7b unit 1 Dream homes(译林牛津版七年级英语下册教案教学设计)
“采集浆果”通过精心收集，向本站投稿了17篇7b unit 1 Dream homes(译林牛津版七年级英语下册教案教学设计)，下面是小编为大家准备的7b unit 1 Dream homes(译林牛津版七年级英语下册教案教学设计)，欢迎阅读借鉴。
篇1：7b unit 1 Dream homes(译林牛津版七年级英语下册教案教学设计)
Welcome to the unit
教学目标:
New words: dream, palace, capital
教学方法: task-based approach
教学任务: 1. To talk about cities and countries.
2. Have a discussion in groups, and talk about their dream homes.
3. Write articles about students’ dream homes.
教学过程:
Step 1. Warm-up (presentation)
1. Ask if any students have lived in another country. Elicit from students ideas about an ideal place to live.
2.Do a mini-survey. Ask students which is their favourite place to live.
Step 2. Listening
Listen to the tape, answer my question, Which is Eddie’s favourite place to live? Help the Ss to answer.
Listen again, Ss read after the tape recorder, then act it out.
Language points:
1.I’d like to live next to a restaurant.
① would like sth.= want sth
would like to do sth = want to do sth
e.g. Would you like some water?= Do you want some water?
Would you like to go with us? Yes, I’d love/ like to.=Do you want to go with us? Yes, I do.
② next to =beside
e.g. Tom’s house is next to mine.
Jack wants to sit next to me.
2. Learn about homes in different countries.
① learn about
I want to learn more about the world.
② learn from
We should help each other and learn from each other.
③ different → same
in different classes in the same class
Step 3. Countries and capitals
1.Ask students to study the pictures on page 3.
2.Say: The capital of China is Beijing . The Capital is the most
important city in a country. Ask students to do Part B. Ask them to check with others.
Step 4. Discussion (task)
Have a discussion in groups of four to talk about their dream homes.
Each group will choose a student to tell us about his / her dream home.
Why?
Language points:
The capital of the USA is Washington D.C.
the capital of ……
e.g. Nanjing is the capital of Jiangsu Province.
The capital of China is Beijing.
Step 5.Sum-up
Go through the new words and the language points learnt during this lesson.
Step 6. Homework
1.Review the contents of this lesson.
2. Write articles about students’ dream homes.
Reading
教学目标:
New words: balcony, cushion, beach, sea, bunk beds, town, wooden, over,
climb, ladder , quiet, rain, while, sitting room, street, share, friendly,
above, dining room, grow, most, lie
教学方法: task-based approach
教学任务: 1. To read and learn about different types of homes and lifestyles..
2. To obtain details about homes in different countries.
3. To respond to the text by making statements about the foreign students’ activities.
4.Write an article to introduce their own homes, using the four home pages as a model.
教学步骤:
Step 1. Warm-up
Ask some students to report their homework about dream homes.
Step 2. Presentation
1.Use the pictures to teach the new words.
balcony cushions ladder kitchen bunk beds sitting room
2. Complete the following sentences using the new words.
⑴ Two beds , one above the other, are .
⑵ In most homes, people cook meals in the .
⑶ We usually put the sofa in the .
⑷ is a good place to chat with friends.
⑸ Sitting on the big is very comfortable.
⑹ We can climb the tall tree with a .
Step 3.Listening
Now, let’s listen to the home pages of four foreign students, after you
listen to them, please do some “T” or “F” exercises. Check the answers
with the whole class.
1.Stephen lives near the sea.
2.There are more than ten rooms in Stephen’s house.
3.Maddee lives in a wooden house in the hills.
4.Maddee has a small family.
5.Neil has a TV in the kitchen.
6.Neil’s dog sleeps in the sitting room.
7.Anna’s flat is on a busy street.
8.Anna shares a bedroom with her brother.
9.Stephen’s favourite place is the balcony.
10.Anna lives in a large flat.
Step 4. Reading
Ss read the articles by yourselves. Then check their reading.
Language points:
1.We sit on the big floor cushions and look out at the beach and the sea.
look out (of) …
e.g. Don’t look out of the window in class.
look at / look around / look for / look like / look forward to / look after / look up
2. I live with my family in a wooden house.= I live with my family in a house made of wood.
wooden(adj.) → wood (n.)
e.g. We need some wooden chairs.
This house is made of wood.
3. I climb a ladder to get into my house. =I get into my house with a ladder.
①e.g. I often go to her house to see Uncle Li.
Daniel often goes to the shopping mall to play computer games.
② get into → get out of
get into the car get out of the car
4. I do not have my own bedroom.
own(adj./v.) → owner (n.)
e.g. I see with my own eyes.
Who’s the owner of this pen?= Who owns this pen?
5. My family and I often sit in the kitchen while my mother makes dinner.
e.g. I am reading books while my brother is watching TV.
She called while you were out.
6. I share a bedroom with my sister.
share sth with sb
e.g. The boy shared his toy with other children
share in sth
e.g. We should share in our sorrows as well as joys.
7. Our neighbours are friendly and we are happy here.
e.g. I’m friendly with her.
be friendly to sb
e.g. People are usually friendly to foreign friends.
8.Simon wrote down the meaning of some of the words.
①write + n. +down=write down +n. write it /them down
e.g. Can you write down the words on your book ?
= Can you write the words on your book?
OK, I’ll write them down.
②meaning (n.) → mean(v.)
e.g. What’s the meaning of “quick?= What does “quick” mean?
9.A garden is the best place to grow flowers.
e.g. It’s really a good place to go.
I’m hungry. Do you have anything to eat?
10.Stephen is lying on his bunk beds.
lie → lying tie → tying die → dying tell a lie
e.g. Don’t tell a lie any more . It’s not good for you.
Step 5.Discussion (task)
Divide the class into groups of six. Ask students to draw picture of their homes.
Students look at their pictures and talk about their homes.
Step 6.Sum-up
Go through the new words and the language points learnt during this lesson.
Step 7. Homework
1. Review the contents of this lesson.
2. Write an article to introduce their own homes, using the four home pages as a model.
Vocabulary ﹠ Grammar
教学目标:
New words: cupboard, bookshelf, shower, lamp, wardrobe, sink, bath, basin,
in front of , opposite, chalk, air conditioner, below, printer, shelf,
top, tidy, sixteen, nineteen, seventy, ninety, thousand, million, arrive,
seventh, sixth, come, exam, second, third, fourth, fifth, ninth, eleventh,
twelfth, twentieth, sound
教学难点: prepositions of place
cardinal numbers & ordinal numbers
教学方法: task-based approach
教学任务:
1.To use prepositions of place to identify specific locations of things.
2.To revise and use cardinal numbers in everyday situations , including phone numbers and amounts of money.
3.To understand the purpose of ordinal numbers in terms of ordering things and events.
4.To use ordinal and cardinal numbers to talk about schedules, dates, scores and results.
教学过程:
Step 1. Warm-up
Ask the student on duty to give a free talk.
Step 2. Vocabulary
Ask the students how many words they already know about furniture.
Then teach furniture. Use pictures to teach other words. e.g. chair,
cupboard, lamp, sofa, table, wardrobe…Ask the students to write the names under the pictures(Page 75).
Step 3.Grammar
1.Prepostitions of place
We use prepositions of place to say where things are. Prepositions of place: above, at, behind, below, beside, between, in, in front of , inside, next to, on , opposite, over, under.
e.g. Millie sits in front of me.
Amy sits between Millie and Simon.
Kitty sits next to Sandy.
Sandy sits between Kitty and me.
Simon sits in front of Kitty.
The window is opposite the door.
The chalk is on the teacher’s desk.
Language points:
⑴above, over, on
above →(反) below表示位置高于某物在其上方，并不表示正上方。over
→(反)under表示正方，指垂直上方上。on指两个事物表面接触，一个在另一个上面。
e.g. There’s a bridge over the river.
The plane flew above us.
There’s a book on the teacher’s desk.
⑵between, among
between一般指两者之间，among指三个或三个以上之间。
e.g. I am sitting between my parents.
I saw him among the students.
⑶in front of , in the front of
in front of →(反)behind 表示“在……前面”in the front of →(反) at the back
of表示“在……前部”，指某一结构本体的前部。
e.g. There is a garden in front of the house.
The desk for the teacher is in the front of the classroom.
⑷beside = next to
e.g. David sits next to/beside me.
Finish off the exercise on page 9.
2. Cardinal numbers
We use cardinal numbers almost every day. We use them for lots of
different things.
1.基数词的读法：
⑴“几十几”十位和个位之间用“-”。e.g. 32 thirty-two
⑵101-999 百位和十位间加“and”.e.g. 928 nine hundred and twenty-eight
⑶1000以上的数，从后往前每三位一段，倒数第一个数读thousand，倒数第二个数读million，依次类推。e.g. 8,542,601
eight million, five hundred and forty-three thousand, six hundred and one
2 .基数词的运用：
hundred, thousand, million, billion等一般用单数，但以下情况用复数：
⑴表示不定数目：e.g. hundreds of millions of
⑵表示“几十”的数词，其复数形式可以表示年龄或年代。
e.g. in his twenties in the thirties
0 zero 10 ten 20 twenty 100
1 one 11 eleven 30 thirty one hundred
2 two 12 twelve 40 forty 1,000
3 three 13 thirteen 50 fifty one thousand
4 four 14 fourteen 60 sixty 10,000
5 five 15 fifteen 70 seventy ten thousand
6 six 16 sixteen 80 eighty 100,000
7 seven 17 seventeen 90 ninety one hundred thousand
8 eight 18 eighteen 1,000,000
9 nine 19 nineteen one million
3. Ordinal numbers
We can use ordinal numbers to to order things and events. We use them to talk about dates, floors, results, etc.
e.g. Uncle Jim will arrive on the seventh of June.
The restaurant is on the sixth floor.
Millie came first in the English exam.
Cardinal numbers Cardinal numbers Ordinal numbers Ordinal numbers
1=one 10=ten 1st=first 10th=tenth
2=two 11=eleven 2nd=second 11th=eleventh
3=three 12=twelve 3rd=third 12th=twelfth
4=four 13=thirteen 4th=fourth 13th=thirteen
5=five 20=twenty 5th=fifth 20th=twentieth
6=six 21=twenty-first 6th=sixth 21st=twenty-first
7=seven 22=twenty-second 7th=seventh 22nd=twenty-second
8=eight 23=twenty-three 8th=eighth 23rd=twenty-third
9=nine 30=thirty 9th=ninth 30th=thirtieth
Language points:
1. 序数词的运用：
⑴表示日期：e.g. 6月1日 on the first of June/ on June (the) first
⑵表示编号：e.g. lesson 5 the fifth lesson
⑶起副词作用，前无“the” e.g. Simon came first in the English exam.
⑷序数词前有限定词修饰时，不加“the”. e.g. This is my first lesson.
2 .I’ll arrive in Beijing on Sunday.
arrive (vi.) arrive in(大地点)/at (小地点）= get to = reach
e.g. The train arrived an hour ago.
He arrives at school on time every day.=He gets to school on time every
day.= He reaches school on time every day.
arrive there/ here/home =get there/ here/ home= reach there/ here/ home
3.I can’t wait to see you.
can’t wait to do sth
e.g. The boy can’t wait to turn on T V when he gets home..
4.That sounds great.
sound (taste/ smell/ look/ feel/get/ turn/ become)+ adj.
5.Where else are we going?=What other places are we going?
where/what/who…+else something/anything/nothing/someone…+else
e.g. Do you want anything else?
We must find somebody else to do this job.
Step 4. Discussion (task)
Have a discussion and find out the differences between cardinal
numbers and ordinal numbers.
Step 5.Homework
1. Review the contents of this lesson.
2. Do the Exx of the workbook.
Integrated skills and Study skills
教学目标:
New words: bathroom, mirror , afraid , still, message
Key points: be different from May I speak to…, please?
Who’s calling? Can I take a message?
教学方法: task-based approach
教学任务:
1.To recognize words about homes, to identify items related to homes, to
under
-stand the location of rooms and furniture, to identify specific
information about furniture items and to show understanding of relevant
information by completing an e-mail
2.To develop grammar learning strategies and to use a recording system to
help memorize grammatical structures.
教学步骤:
Step 1. Warm-up
Ask the student on duty to give a free talk.
Integrated skills
Step 2.At home in Britain
Ask the Ss to study the pictures in Part 1carefully. Encourage them to ask questions about the pictures. e.g. Where do Neil and his family watch TV? Where do you think the house is? Listen to the tape, and ask the Ss to order the pictures. Check the answers with the whole class.
Listen to the recording again. Do the “T” or “F” exercises.
1. Neil and his family don’t sit in the kitchen.
2. There is a garden behind the kitchen.
3. There is a large table in the dining room.
4. Neil’s family watches TV in the dinging room.
5. The bathroom is new.
6. There is a lamp and some posters in Neil’s bedroom.
Ask students to read the words in the box in Part A2 and use them to label the things in the pictures in Part A1.
In pair, students check their answers. Ask them to label as many of the other things as they can in the pictures.
Ask students to read Amy’s e-mail in PartA3 to obtain general understanding. Check their choice of words. Students take turns to read the completed e-mail to the class.
Step 3. Speak up
Listen to the tape recording and read after it.
Ask the Ss to work in pairs to make up new conversation for leaving a message with Neil’s mother using the conversation in Part B as a model.
Ask a few pairs to present their conversations to the class.
Step 7. Study skills ( Making a grammar pattern book)
Take students through the two patterns at the top of the page.
Ask students toe Part A using the two grammar patterns. Encourage them to
use a different colour for each part of speech .
Ask students to write the two patterns on separate pages in a notebook.
Language points:
1.It’s really different from the flats in Beijing.
be different from
e.g. Your pen is different from mine.
City life is very different from Country life.
different(adj.) → difference(n.)
the difference between…and…
e.g. There are many differences between English and Chinese Names.
2. Who’s calling/speaking/that? （打电话用语）请问你是谁？
我是用This is… e.g. This is Jack speaking.
3. Can I take a message?
take a message (for sb)
4. I’ll ask him to call you back.
Step 8. Sum-up
Go through the new words and the language points learnt during this
lesson.
Step 9. Homework
1. Review the contents of this lesson.
2. Do the Exx of the workbook.
Main task ＆ Checkout
教学目标:
New words: at least, ground floor, swimming pool, football pitch
教学方法: task-based approach
教学任务:
1.Get the Ss to write an article about their dream home using Simon’s article as model.
2.To use prepositions of place to describe where things are
3. To use cardinal and ordinal numbers to talk about where people live.
教学步骤:
Step 1. Warm-up
Ask the student on duty to give a free talk.
Step 2. Main task
Ask the Ss to read the questionnaires , then complete it with students’ own information.
Listen to Simon’s dream home. Then students read it after the recording.
Ask them some specific questions to check comprehension.
⑴ Would you like a large room?
⑵ How many rooms are there in your dream home?
⑶ Are 25 rooms too many?
⑷ What other things does Simon want to have in his dream home?
⑸ Simon doesn’t want a garden . What about you?
⑹ Simon’s wishes are quite unusual. What does he want instead of a garden?
Give students 5-10minutes to discuss Simon’s dream home in pairs.
Encourage students to say what they like and what they do not like in his
home.
Step 3. Writing (task)
Ask students to write about their own dream home . Ask them to write down everything that they can think of associated with their dream home. Ask some able students to read their drafts in front of the class.
Step 4. Checkout
Get the Ss to do Part A & B on their own. Divide the class into pairs.
Students correct each other’s work and write the score in the “paw.”
Checkout: Helping people in a shopping mall
Language points:
1. There are at least 25 rooms.
at least → at most
e.g. It will cost at least five dollars.
The little girl is two at least.
2.This means that lots of people can stay with me.
e.g. The red lights mean “stop.”
His work means everything to him.
3.There is a swimming pool which is 50 metres long.
4.I have a room with twelve showers and four baths.
with(prep.) → without(prep.)
I have a foreign friend with brown hair.
His father often goes to work without (having ) breakfast.
Step 5. Sum-up
Go through the new words and the language points learnt during this lesson.
Step 6. Homework
1. Review the contents of this lesson.
2. Do the Exx of the workbook.
篇2：江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案7B Unit1 Dream homes(译林牛津版七年级英语下册教案教学设计)
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人：陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit1 Dream homes 总课时 9 第 1 课时
课 题 Welcome to the unit 课型 New
教学目标 1. To talk about cities and countries.
2. Have a discussion in groups, and talk about their dream homes.
3. Write articles about students’ dream homes.
教学重点 Have a discussion in groups, and talk about their dream homes.
教学难点 Have a discussion in groups, and talk about their dream homes.
课前预习1. Preview the new words and phrases.
2. To talk about the favourite place.
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step1
Warm-up (presentation)
Step2.
Listening
Step3.
Language points:
Step4.
Countries and capitals
Step5:
Discussion (task):
Step5: Sum-up
Step6: Homework 1. Ask if any students have lived in another country. Elicit from students ideas about an ideal place to live.
2.Do a mini-survey. Ask students which is their favourite place to live.
Listen to the tape, answer my question, Which is Eddie’s favourite place to live? Help the Ss to answer.
Listen again, Ss read after the tape recorder, then act it out.
1.I’d like to live next to a restaurant.
① would like sth.= want sth
would like to do sth = want to do sth
e.g. Would you like some water?= Do you want some water?
Would you like to go with us? Yes, I’d love/ like to.=Do you want to go with us? Yes, I do.
② next to =beside
e.g. Tom’s house is next to mine.Jack wants to sit next to me.
2. Learn about homes in different countries.
① learn about
I want to learn more about the world.
② learn from
We should help each other and learn from each other.
③ different → same
in different classes in the same class
1.Ask students to study the pictures on page 7.
2.Say: The capital of China is Beijing . The Capital is the most important city in a country. Ask students to do Part B. Ask them to check with others.
Have a discussion in groups of four to talk about their dream homes. Each group will choose a student to tell us about his / her dream home. Why?
Language points:
The capital of the USA is Washington D.C.the capital of ……
e.g. Nanjing is the capital of Jiangsu Province.
The capital of China is Beijing.
Go through the new words and the language points learnt during this lesson.
1. Review the contents of this lesson.
2.Write articles about students’ dream homes.
教学反思
江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人：陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit1 Dream homes 总课时 9 第 2 课时
课 题 Reading (1) 课型 New
教学目标 1. To understand different countries living environment.
2. To access to the information of different ways of life.
3. The study description, description of the others home life style.
教学重点 1. How to describe home, description way of life.
2. The phrase and the sentence pattern: master
教学难点 1. How to describe home, description way of life.
2. The phrase and the sentence pattern: master
课前预习Preview the new words and phrases.
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step1.
Free talk
Step2 Show the aims
Step 3 Presentation
Step 4 Practice
Step 5 Reading
Step6 Summary
Step7:
Homework Where would you like to live in? Why do you like it? What’s the capital of the UK? Use these sentences to make a dialogue.
Work in pairs
Show the learning aims to the students.
Teacher says My dream home isn’t a flat because it is too small. I wouldn’t like to live in a palace because it is too big. I would like to live in a house like this. Then show a picture of a wooden house with two floors. Tell the students look , here is a beautiful house .It is my dream home. It isn’t in a big city. It is in a town and near the sea. When I am free, I can walk on the beach and enjoy the sunshine. It is a wooden house. Do you like my dream home?
Then, ask What rooms do I need I my dream home? and teach the new words.
Do you live in a flat or in a house?
What rooms do you have?
What do you do in each of these rooms?
Ask and answer in pairs.
1. In China, most of us live in tall buildings. What about people in other countries? Do you know about the homes in different countries? Today ,we will read four home pages of four foreign students. They would like to tell us something about their homes .Now, please read their home pages. What are their names?
2. Listen to the tape and answer the questions.
Stephen: Where is he from? Which is his favourite place? Why?
Where does he chat with friends?
3. Analyze the language points.
4. Use the same way to read Madee’s.
Madee: Where does he live? Where is her house?
Who lives with her in her house?
Use the same way to read Neil.
Neil: Where is Neil from?
What does his mother do in his favourite room?The same to Anna.
What does she like to do after dinner?
Does she have her own bedroom?
1.look out (of) …
e.g. Don’t look out of the window in class.
look at / around / for / like / forward to / after / up
2. wooden(adj.) → wood (n.)
e.g. We need some wooden chairs.
This house is made of wood.
3. I climb a ladder to get into my house. =I get into my house with a ladder.
①e.g. I often go to her house to see Uncle Li.Daniel often goes to the shopping mall to play computer games.
② get into → get out of get into the car get out of the car
4. I do not have my own bedroom. own(adj./v.) → owner (n.)
e.g. I see with my own eyes.
Who’s the owner of this pen?= Who owns this pen?
5. My family and I often sit in the kitchen while my mother makes dinner.
e.g. I am reading books while my brother is watching TV.
She called while you were out.
6. I share a bedroom with my sister. share sth with sb
e.g. The boy shared his toy with other children share in sth
e.g. We should share in our sorrows as well as joys.
7. Our neighbours are friendly and we are happy here.
e.g.I’m friendly with her.
be friendly to sb
e.g. People are usually friendly to foreign friends.
8.Simon wrote down the meaning of some of the words.
①write + n. +down=write down +n. write it /them down
e.g. Can you write down the words on your book ?
= Can you write the words on your book?
②meaning (n.) → mean(v.)
e.g. What’s the meaning of “quick?= What does “quick” mean?
9.A garden is the best place to grow flowers.
e.g. It’s really a good place to go.
I’m hungry. Do you have anything to eat?
9.Stephen is lying on his bunk beds.
lie → lying tie → tying die → dying tell a lie
e.g. Don’t tell a lie any more. It’s not good for you.
1.Recite the new words and the text.
2.Retell the home pages of the two students.
教学反思
江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人：陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit1 Dream homes 总课时 9 第 3 课时
课 题 Reading (2) 课型 New
教学目标 1. Master the new words and phrases
2. Get the students to learn how to describe their own dream homes.
3. Improve the students ’ speaking and writing ability.
教学重点 1. Get the students to learn how to describe their own dream homes.
2. Improve the students ’ speaking and writing ability.
教学难点 1. Get the students to learn how to describe their own dream homes.
2. Improve the students ’ speaking and writing ability.
课前预习Preview the new words..
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step1 Revision
Step2 Phrases
Step3 Retelling
Step4. Consolidations
Step5.Writing
Step 6:
Homework Revise the contents we learned yesterday by asking them some questions about different kinds of homes of the four students.
1.Group work. The students work in groups of four to check the useful phrases in the pages.
2. List the phrases on the blackboard. Talk about them with the class.
Ask more able students to retell the four pages with the help of phrases on the blackboard.
Ask less able students to fill in the blanks according to the phrases on the blackboard.
Ask the students to do P11, C1. If the sentence is wrong, find out the mistake and correct it.
P11, C2. Read the words in the box first. Then ask some questions about each picture. Next, get the students to fill in the blanks by themselves. Finally, read the sentences loudly.
Word competition. Show the students pictures of different rooms or furniture, and get them to say the words as quickly as possible. Then ask them to finish P9, B1. Finally, read these words loudly.
Group work. The students work in groups of four to make up sentences to talk about different rooms. Ask less able students to write down the sentences in the notebook. Model sentence: We usually eat meals in a dining room. Then, ask students to read their sentences to the class. Finally, ask the students to finish P9, B2. Help Simon write the correct words above the mistakes.
1.Read the four pages loudly and try to remember them.
2. Write a short page to introduce your own home.
学习*研讨：
1. I share a bedroom with my sister.我和我姐姐共用一间卧室。
share sth with sb. 意为“与某人分享某物，两人共同拥有某物。”
上面的句子也可这样说：
My sister and I share a bedroom.
My sister and I live in a bedroom together.
此外，share还可用作名词，意为“一份，份额。” 例如：
Each student has a share of the food.每个学生都有一份食物。
2. Our neighbours are friendly and we are happy here.我们的邻居很友好，我们在这儿很快乐。friendly是 friend的形容词，意为“友好的”。有这样的结构：be friendly to sb意为“对某人友好。”类似的词有：
Love -lovely（可爱的）night--nightly（每夜的）
3. A garden is a good place to grow flowers.花园是种花最好的地方。To grow flowers是动词不定式作定语，修饰the best place。如I have a lot of homework to do today.今天我有许多作业要做。
Would you like something to eat?你想要点吃的吗？
4. I don’t have my own bedroom.我没有自己的卧室。own在这里作形容词，意为“自己的”。如：I do my homework with my own pen. 我用自己的笔做作业。
owner意为“拥有者，所有者”
The owner of the car is my father.这辆小汽车的拥有者是我爸。
5. My family and I often sit in the kitchen while my mother cooks dinner.妈妈做晚餐时我常和家人一起座在厨房里。
while意为“当---的时候，和---同时”。如；
Please help him clean the classroom while you here.
1. Review the contents of this lesson.
2. Write an article to introduce their own homes, using the four home pages as a model.
教学反思
江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人：陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit1 Dream homes 总课时 9 第 4 课时
课 题 Vocabulary 课型 New
教学目标 1. Learn more about the furniture
2. To classify types of furniture and the rooms to which they belong
教学重点 To classify types of furniture and the rooms to which they belong
教学难点 To classify types of furniture and the rooms to which they belong
课前预习Preview the new words..
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step1 Revision
Step2. Presentation
Step 3.
A game
Step4 Writing
Step5 . Matching
Step6: Games
Step 7:
Homework
1．Ask the students some questions: Do you remember the four students from different countries? What countries are they from? Where do they live? What are their homes like? etc.
1. Show the students some photos of different rooms.
2. Teach new words about furniture.
Look at a photo of a bedroom, what can you see in it? Teach: bedside table, lamp.
This is a picture of a kitchen. What’s this in the kitchen? Where can we do some washing in the kitchen? Teach fridge, cupboard, sink.
Teach: coffee table, sofa, bookcase, armchair. Where do you meet your friends at home? I usually chat with my friends in the sitting room. Look, what can you see in this sitting room?
Look, what room is it, do you know? It’s a bathroom. Can you tell me what we have in a bathroom?
Teach: shower, bath, toilet.
Write down the following words on the blackboard.
bedside table, lamp, coffee table, sofa, bookcase, armchair, fridge, cupboard, sink, shower, bath, toilet, dining room
视情况可补充以下词汇：air conditioner, rug, carpet, fan, curtains, cushion, blinds, microwave oven, fork, spoon, plate, dish, washing machine, wardrobe, pillow, sheet, quilt
Ask the students to read these words loudly and try to remember them.
Play a game: give the students different pictures of furniture. Ask them to work in groups of four and try to think out the names of the furniture. Ask less able students in the group to write these words down in their notebooks.
After the students finish writing, choose several students to write down the words of furniture on the blackboard.
Page 12, A. Ask the students to finish this exercise by themselves.
Read these words.
Look at the words on the blackboard. Tell the students that people put the furniture in different rooms. Do you know where to put them?
Ask the students to work in pairs to match furniture and rooms.
Ask the students to finish P12, B. Circle the wrong words and put them into the correct rooms.
Make sentences. The students work in groups of four, one student says: I have a bed in my bedroom. A second student should say like this: I have a bed and a computer in my bedroom. A third student should say: I have a bed, a computer and a lamp in my bed. Each student does it like this. If one student can’t remember the sentence, he will lose the game.
Teacher gives help to the less able students.
Read and remember the words of furniture.
Draw a picture of your own room and write down the words of furniture.
学习*研讨：
What do you call these pieces of furniture? 你把这些家具都称为什么？
furniture意为“家具”，是不可数名词。只能说a piece of furniture（一件家具），two pieces of furniture（两件家具）
教学反思
江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人：陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit1 Dream homes 总课时 9 第 5 课时
课 题 Grammar I 课型 New
教学目标 To use the prepositions of place to talk about object
教学重点 To use the prepositions of place to talk about object
教学难点 To use the prepositions of place to talk about object
课前预习1. Preview the new words.
2. To know the prepositions learnt before.
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step1.
Go over
Step2
Presentation
Step3. Reading
Step4. Practice
Step5 . Practice
Step 6Check the answers.
Step7
Homework Check the preview homework together and solve the students’ problem.
Use the students’ drawings of their own homes. Talk about the furniture. Where is her desk? What’s on the wall?
Let the students ask and answer in pairs: Where does… sit? Talk about the seats in the classroom.
Present and list these prepositions of place on the blackboard.
Talk about Daniel’s classroom with the class. Read the sentences loudly.
Look at the picture on P13, talk about it with the class. What can you see in Kate’s bedroom? Where are her toys? Is there anything under the bed?Ask the students to finish the dialogue by themselves.
Read the dialogue to each other.
1. Talk about Mickey’s room. Ask the students to fill in the blanks.
Look, this is Mickey’s room. He is sitting ____ his armchair. The armchair is ______ the bookcase and the desk. There is a lamp _____ the desk. What’s ____ Mickey? It’s his dog. He is sleeping ___ the floor. There is box ____ the dog, you can see many toys in it. Can you see a yellow toy truck? Yes, it is _____ to the box.
2. Read the passage.
学习*研讨：
1. Millie sits in front of me.米莉座在我的面前。（1）In front of 意为“在---的前面”，是指外部的前面；in the front of意为“在---的前”部，是指内部的前面。如：
There are lots of flowers in front of the
building.大楼的前面有许多花。
There is a blackboard in the front of the classroom.教室的前面有一块黑板。
（2）Before 与in front of都有“在---之前”的意思。但当表示“在建筑物的前面”时，应用in front of，当表示“在某段时间或某件事件之前”时，用Before。如：
The bus stips in front of the shopping mall.公共汽车停在大买场的前面。
You must finish this work before Tuesday.你必须在星期二之前完成这项工作。
2.常见介词的用法。
常见的反义词如下：
1. inside-outside above---below over---under in front of ---behind
（2）between与 among的区别：
between用与两者之间，而三者或三者以上之间用among
教学反思
江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人：陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit1 Dream homes 总课时 9 第 6 课时
课 题 Grammar II 课型 New
教学目标 To revise the cardinal numbers and use them to talk about telephone numbers
To use the ordinal numbers to talk about the dates, the scores and results
教学重点 To revise the cardinal numbers and use them to talk about telephone numbers
To use the ordinal numbers to talk about the dates, the scores and results
教学难点 To revise the cardinal numbers and use them to talk about telephone numbers
To use the ordinal numbers to talk about the dates, the scores and results
课前预习1. Preview the new words.
2. Do the Exercises from Page32 to Page35 by themselves before class.
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step 1
Revision
Step 2. Cardinal numbers
Step3. Practice
Step 4 . Telephone numbers
Step 5 . Writing checks
Step 6 . Ordinal numbers
Step 7. Practice
Step8 Check the answers.
Step9 :
Homework Check the preview homework together and solve the students’ problem.
Revise the cardinal numbers.Teach the students more cardinal numbers. (one hundred, one thousand, one million, one billion, eleven point five). Write these words and numbers on the blackboard. Ask them to read these words and give them more examples.
Write some numbers on the blackboard and ask the students to read them in English.
Go to P14, and ask the students to read the cardinal numbers and finish B1 by themselves. Ask the students to listen to the teacher, and write down the numbers: 598, 7493,…
Tell the students your telephone number in English, and see whether they can write it down in numbers. Ask the students to write down their telephone numbers and try to remember them and say them in English. Go to P15, B2. The students read it and write down the words by themselves.
To P15, B3. Ask the students to finish it in pairs. Read these numbers to each other.
Group work. Ask the students to draw a check and write down the numbers on the check. Then, they should read the numbers to their partners. Their partners should write down the numbers.
Revise the ordinal numbers by talking about dates and birthdays. Write down some words on the blackboard. (first, second, third, fifth, eighth, ninth, twelfth, fifteenth, twentieth, twenty-fourth)
Ask the students to read these words and try to find out the rules.
P16, C1, the students write the numbers out in words.
Talk about Neil’s visit to Beijing with the class. Ask questions: What do Neil and Simon want to do on February, 20th? When do they go to the Summer Palace? Ask them to complete the dialogue on P17. Read the dialogue after the teacher and then read it to each other. Go to P17, C3, talk about the score and then write it out in words.
Check the answers to the exercises
学习*研讨：
1. 序数词 “第一，第二，第三”是特殊：first, second, third从第四开始有规律，大多数直接在基数词后加th。“第几十”请注意，变y为ie再加th。序数词在句中作定语是时一般与定冠词the连用。如：
My teacher is always the first one to get to school.我的老师总是第一个到校。
Our team won the first prize in the football match. 我们队在这次足球比赛中赢得了第一。
序数词前有形容词性物主代词作定语时，省去the
This is my second time to watch the lion dance.这是我第二次看舞狮。
2．I’ll arrive in Beijing on Sunday.我将于周日到达北京。arrive 为不及物动词，意为“到达”若与 in 连用，后面接大地点，若与at 连用后面接小地点。可与get to， reach互换。如：I usually arrive at school at seven o’clock.我通常7点到学校。
3. I can’t wait to see you .我迫不及待要见你。
Can’t wait to do sth意为“迫不及待地做某事”
On the morning of Chinese new year , we can’t wait to put on the new clothes.春节的早上，我们迫不及待要穿上新衣服。
4．That sounds great, Simon.听起来很棒，西蒙。Sound为连系动词，后接形容词作表语意为“听起来”类似的词还有taste , look, feel, smell等。
5．where else are we going ?
where else=what other places
else 常放在what , who, where等疑问词及与 –body, -one, -place, -thing结合而成的不定代词后
1. Review the contents of this lesson.
2. Do the Exx of the workbook.
教学反思
江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人：陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit1 Dream homes 总课时 9 第 7 课时
课 题 Integrated Skills 课型 New
教学目标 1.To recognize words about homes, to identify items related to homes, to under
-stand the location of rooms and furniture, to identify specific information about furniture items and to show understanding of relevant information by completing an e-mail
2. To develop grammar learning strategies and to use a recording system to help memorize grammatical structures.
教学重点 The objects in rooms Ss’ writing and listening ability
教学难点 The objects in rooms Ss’ writing and listening ability
课前预习Preview the new words
Do the listening part before class.
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step1. Warm-up
Step2: At home in Britain
Step3:
Speak up
Step4: Study skills ( Making a grammar pattern book)
Step5: Sum-up
Step6:
Homework Ask the student on duty to give a free talk.
Integrated skills
Ask the Ss to study the pictures in Part 1carefully. Encourage them to ask questions about the pictures. e.g. Where do Neil and his family watch TV? Where do you think the house is? Listen to the tape, and ask the Ss to order the pictures. Check the answers with the whole class.
Listen to the recording again. Do the “T” or “F” exercises.
1. Neil and his family don’t sit in the kitchen.
2. There is a garden behind the kitchen.
3. There is a large table in the dining room.
4. Neil’s family watches TV in the dinging room.
5. The bathroom is new.
6. There is a lamp and some posters in Neil’s bedroom.
Ask students to read the words in the box in Part A2 and use them to label the things in the pictures in Part A1.
In pair, students check their answers. Ask them to label as many of the other things as they can in the pictures.
Ask students to read Amy’s e-mail in PartA3 to obtain general understanding. Check their choice of words. Students take turns to read the completed e-mail to the class.
Listen to the tape recording and read after it.
Ask the Ss to work in pairs to make up new conversation for leaving a message with Neil’s mother using the conversation in Part B as a model. Ask a few pairs to present their conversations to the class.
Take students through the two patterns at the top of the page.
Ask students toe Part A using the two grammar patterns. Encourage them to use a different colour for each part of speech .
Ask students to write the two patterns on separate pages in a notebook.
Language points:
1.It’s really different from the flats in Beijing.
be different from
e.g. Your pen is different from mine.
City life is very different from Country life.
different(adj.) → difference(n.)
the difference between…and…
e.g. There are many differences between English and Chinese Names.
2. Who’s calling/speaking/that? （打电话用语）请问你是谁？
我是用This is… e.g. This is Jack speaking.
Is that ….speaking? 你是某某某吗？
3. Can I take a message?
take a message (for sb) leave a message 留口信
4. I’ll ask him to call you back.
Go through the new words and the language points learnt during this lesson.
1. Review the contents of this lesson.
2. Do the Exercises of the workbook.
教学反思
江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人：陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit1 Dream homes 总课时 9 第 8 课时
课 题 Main Task 课型 New
教学目标 1.能看懂并正确填写问卷；
2.能清晰写出自己的梦想家园。
教学重点 梦想家园的表述
教学难点 梦想家园的表述
课前预习Read out the dialogue in Speak up
Listen to the tape to review the syllables.
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step1 Free talk
Step2: Pair work
Step3 Free talk
Step4:
Practice
Step5:
Homework Free talk----your own house
T: Are you interested in my house?
Ss: Yes.
T: Ok. I’ll tell you. Please listen carefully and take some notes. And after listening you should retell the information, Ok?
Ss: OK.
T: I live in a small flat on Matai Street and it is very comfortable. It is on the third floor. In it there are all together five rooms: two bedrooms, a sitting room, a kitchen and a bathroom. I live alone and my house is very simple. I have a sofa, a TV, a wardrobe, a shower, a computer, a desk, a bed, a fridge, and an air conditioner. If you would like to visit my plat please call the number 83206235.
T: That’s all. Now please try to retell the information about me according to your notes.
S: ……
T: Very good. (Show Ss my questionnaire answer of my home from the computer) Please check your notes by yourselves. And after checking, please fill in your own information.
Ask students to make interviews in pairs and try to have clear ideas about their partner’s homes.
Free talk----dream home
1) T: Now we’ve already know much about our homes. Some of you live in plats and some of you live in villas. For me I also hope to live in a big and beautiful villa. I want to have more rooms, a garden and a swimming pool. That’s my dream home. Do you like it?
Ss: …
T: Ok. Different people have different ideas. Now let’s learn something about your old friend Simon’s dream home on page 18.
Think about your own dream home and talk about it with your partner.
Write a passage about your dream home, no less than 80 words.
完成句子：
1. Do you know Mr. Scott’s___________（姓）.
2. I sleep on the top of the bunk __________ (bed).
3. There is a f________ p________ (足球场) in our school.
4. I want to ______________. （洗个淋浴）.
5. The swimming pool is ___________ （至少）50 metres long.
6. My ____________ （梦想家园）is very large and beautiful.
7. The music ___________ (听起来) nice.
8. The c_______ （首都）of Russia is Moscow.
9. My parents live in a __________ （木制的）.
9.Aunt Lucy _________ (种) all kinds of flowers in the garden.
1. Review the contents of this lesson.
2. Do the Exercises of the workbook.
教学反思
江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人：陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit1 Dream homes 总课时 9 第 9 课时
课 题 Checkout 课型 New
教学目标 1. 复习方位介词；
2. 复习家具名称；
3. 复习基数词和序数词
教学重点 理想家园的表述
教学难点 理想家园的表述
课前预习1. New words 2.Preview the text.
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step1 Review the preps
Step2 Review cardinal numbers and ordinal numbers
Step3 Review dream home
Step 6:
Homework Review the preps
in front of/ between/ next to/ between/ opposite/ above/ at/ behind/ below/ beside/ in/ inside/ next to/ on/ outside/ over/ under
Ask Ss to use preps to tell where they sit in the classroom and ask several Ss to describe others’ seats.
Finish part A on page 23
Ask Ss to put all the things into the right places and describe their ideal rooms
Review cardinal numbers and ordinal numbers
1) Ask students to say their student numbers/ telephone numbers/birthdays/the dates of festivals (Mother’s Day/Thanksgiving Day)
2) Ask Ss to write both cardinal numbers and ordinal numbers from 1 to 29
Finish part B on page 23
Review dream home
1) Ask Ss to match the things with the correct rooms.
2) Ask Ss to tell both their real homes and dream homes
3) Give Ss some hints to write a new passage about dream home.
1. Review the contents of this lesson.
2. Do the Exercises of the workbook.
教学反思
江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人：陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit1 Dream homes 总课时 9 第 1 课时
课 题 Welcome to the unit 课型 New
教学目标 1. To talk about cities and countries.
2. Have a discussion in groups, and talk about their dream homes.
3. Write articles about students’ dream homes.
教学重点 Have a discussion in groups, and talk about their dream homes.
教学难点 Have a discussion in groups, and talk about their dream homes.
课前预习1. Preview the new words and phrases.
2. To talk about the favourite place.
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step1
Warm-up (presentation)
Step2.
Listening
Step3.
Language points:
Step4.
Countries and capitals
Step5:
Discussion (task):
Step5: Sum-up
Step6: Homework 1. Ask if any students have lived in another country. Elicit from students ideas about an ideal place to live.
2.Do a mini-survey. Ask students which is their favourite place to live.
Listen to the tape, answer my question, Which is Eddie’s favourite place to live? Help the Ss to answer.
Listen again, Ss read after the tape recorder, then act it out.
1.I’d like to live next to a restaurant.
① would like sth.= want sth
would like to do sth = want to do sth
e.g. Would you like some water?= Do you want some water?
Would you like to go with us? Yes, I’d love/ like to.=Do you want to go with us? Yes, I do.
② next to =beside
e.g. Tom’s house is next to mine.Jack wants to sit next to me.
2. Learn about homes in different countries.
① learn about
I want to learn more about the world.
② learn from
We should help each other and learn from each other.
③ different → same
in different classes in the same class
1.Ask students to study the pictures on page 7.
2.Say: The capital of China is Beijing . The Capital is the most important city in a country. Ask students to do Part B. Ask them to check with others.
Have a discussion in groups of four to talk about their dream homes. Each group will choose a student to tell us about his / her dream home. Why?
Language points:
The capital of the USA is Washington D.C.the capital of ……
e.g. Nanjing is the capital of Jiangsu Province.
The capital of China is Beijing.
Go through the new words and the language points learnt during this lesson.
1. Review the contents of this lesson.
2.Write articles about students’ dream homes.
教学反思
江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人：陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit1 Dream homes 总课时 9 第 2 课时
课 题 Reading (1) 课型 New
教学目标 1. To understand different countries living environment.
2. To access to the information of different ways of life.
3. The study description, description of the others home life style.
教学重点 1. How to describe home, description way of life.
2. The phrase and the sentence pattern: master
教学难点 1. How to describe home, description way of life.
2. The phrase and the sentence pattern: master
课前预习Preview the new words and phrases.
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step1.
Free talk
Step2 Show the aims
Step 3 Presentation
Step 4 Practice
Step 5 Reading
Step6 Summary
Step7:
Homework Where would you like to live in? Why do you like it? What’s the capital of the UK? Use these sentences to make a dialogue.
Work in pairs
Show the learning aims to the students.
Teacher says My dream home isn’t a flat because it is too small. I wouldn’t like to live in a palace because it is too big. I would like to live in a house like this. Then show a picture of a wooden house with two floors. Tell the students look , here is a beautiful house .It is my dream home. It isn’t in a big city. It is in a town and near the sea. When I am free, I can walk on the beach and enjoy the sunshine. It is a wooden house. Do you like my dream home?
Then, ask What rooms do I need I my dream home? and teach the new words.
Do you live in a flat or in a house?
What rooms do you have?
What do you do in each of these rooms?
Ask and answer in pairs.
1. In China, most of us live in tall buildings. What about people in other countries? Do you know about the homes in different countries? Today ,we will read four home pages of four foreign students. They would like to tell us something about their homes .Now, please read their home pages. What are their names?
2. Listen to the tape and answer the questions.
Stephen: Where is he from? Which is his favourite place? Why?
Where does he chat with friends?
3. Analyze the language points.
4. Use the same way to read Madee’s.
Madee: Where does he live? Where is her house?
Who lives with her in her house?
Use the same way to read Neil.
Neil: Where is Neil from?
What does his mother do in his favourite room?The same to Anna.
What does she like to do after dinner?
Does she have her own bedroom?
1.look out (of) …
e.g. Don’t look out of the window in class.
look at / around / for / like / forward to / after / up
2. wooden(adj.) → wood (n.)
e.g. We need some wooden chairs.
This house is made of wood.
3. I climb a ladder to get into my house. =I get into my house with a ladder.
①e.g. I often go to her house to see Uncle Li.Daniel often goes to the shopping mall to play computer games.
② get into → get out of get into the car get out of the car
4. I do not have my own bedroom. own(adj./v.) → owner (n.)
e.g. I see with my own eyes.
Who’s the owner of this pen?= Who owns this pen?
5. My family and I often sit in the kitchen while my mother makes dinner.
e.g. I am reading books while my brother is watching TV.
She called while you were out.
6. I share a bedroom with my sister. share sth with sb
e.g. The boy shared his toy with other children share in sth
e.g. We should share in our sorrows as well as joys.
7. Our neighbours are friendly and we are happy here.
e.g.I’m friendly with her.
be friendly to sb
e.g. People are usually friendly to foreign friends.
8.Simon wrote down the meaning of some of the words.
①write + n. +down=write down +n. write it /them down
e.g. Can you write down the words on your book ?
= Can you write the words on your book?
②meaning (n.) → mean(v.)
e.g. What’s the meaning of “quick?= What does “quick” mean?
9.A garden is the best place to grow flowers.
e.g. It’s really a good place to go.
I’m hungry. Do you have anything to eat?
9.Stephen is lying on his bunk beds.
lie → lying tie → tying die → dying tell a lie
e.g. Don’t tell a lie any more. It’s not good for you.
1.Recite the new words and the text.
2.Retell the home pages of the two students.
教学反思
江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人：陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit1 Dream homes 总课时 9 第 3 课时
课 题 Reading (2) 课型 New
教学目标 1. Master the new words and phrases
2. Get the students to learn how to describe their own dream homes.
3. Improve the students ’ speaking and writing ability.
教学重点 1. Get the students to learn how to describe their own dream homes.
2. Improve the students ’ speaking and writing ability.
教学难点 1. Get the students to learn how to describe their own dream homes.
2. Improve the students ’ speaking and writing ability.
课前预习Preview the new words..
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step1 Revision
Step2 Phrases
Step3 Retelling
Step4. Consolidations
Step5.Writing
Step 6:
Homework Revise the contents we learned yesterday by asking them some questions about different kinds of homes of the four students.
1.Group work. The students work in groups of four to check the useful phrases in the pages.
2. List the phrases on the blackboard. Talk about them with the class.
Ask more able students to retell the four pages with the help of phrases on the blackboard.
Ask less able students to fill in the blanks according to the phrases on the blackboard.
Ask the students to do P11, C1. If the sentence is wrong, find out the mistake and correct it.
P11, C2. Read the words in the box first. Then ask some questions about each picture. Next, get the students to fill in the blanks by themselves. Finally, read the sentences loudly.
Word competition. Show the students pictures of different rooms or furniture, and get them to say the words as quickly as possible. Then ask them to finish P9, B1. Finally, read these words loudly.
Group work. The students work in groups of four to make up sentences to talk about different rooms. Ask less able students to write down the sentences in the notebook. Model sentence: We usually eat meals in a dining room. Then, ask students to read their sentences to the class. Finally, ask the students to finish P9, B2. Help Simon write the correct words above the mistakes.
1.Read the four pages loudly and try to remember them.
2. Write a short page to introduce your own home.
学习*研讨：
1. I share a bedroom with my sister.我和我姐姐共用一间卧室。
share sth with sb. 意为“与某人分享某物，两人共同拥有某物。”
上面的句子也可这样说：
My sister and I share a bedroom.
My sister and I live in a bedroom together.
此外，share还可用作名词，意为“一份，份额。” 例如：
Each student has a share of the food.每个学生都有一份食物。
2. Our neighbours are friendly and we are happy here.我们的邻居很友好，我们在这儿很快乐。friendly是 friend的形容词，意为“友好的”。有这样的结构：be friendly to sb意为“对某人友好。”类似的词有：
Love -lovely（可爱的）night--nightly（每夜的）
3. A garden is a good place to grow flowers.花园是种花最好的地方。To grow flowers是动词不定式作定语，修饰the best place。如I have a lot of homework to do today.今天我有许多作业要做。
Would you like something to eat?你想要点吃的吗？
4. I don’t have my own bedroom.我没有自己的卧室。own在这里作形容词，意为“自己的”。如：I do my homework with my own pen. 我用自己的笔做作业。
owner意为“拥有者，所有者”
The owner of the car is my father.这辆小汽车的拥有者是我爸。
5. My family and I often sit in the kitchen while my mother cooks dinner.妈妈做晚餐时我常和家人一起座在厨房里。
while意为“当---的时候，和---同时”。如；
Please help him clean the classroom while you here.
1. Review the contents of this lesson.
2. Write an article to introduce their own homes, using the four home pages as a model.
教学反思
江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人：陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit1 Dream homes 总课时 9 第 4 课时
课 题 Vocabulary 课型 New
教学目标 1. Learn more about the furniture
2. To classify types of furniture and the rooms to which they belong
教学重点 To classify types of furniture and the rooms to which they belong
教学难点 To classify types of furniture and the rooms to which they belong
课前预习Preview the new words..
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step1 Revision
Step2. Presentation
Step 3.
A game
Step4 Writing
Step5 . Matching
Step6: Games
Step 7:
Homework
1．Ask the students some questions: Do you remember the four students from different countries? What countries are they from? Where do they live? What are their homes like? etc.
1. Show the students some photos of different rooms.
2. Teach new words about furniture.
Look at a photo of a bedroom, what can you see in it? Teach: bedside table, lamp.
This is a picture of a kitchen. What’s this in the kitchen? Where can we do some washing in the kitchen? Teach fridge, cupboard, sink.
Teach: coffee table, sofa, bookcase, armchair. Where do you meet your friends at home? I usually chat with my friends in the sitting room. Look, what can you see in this sitting room?
Look, what room is it, do you know? It’s a bathroom. Can you tell me what we have in a bathroom?
Teach: shower, bath, toilet.
Write down the following words on the blackboard.
bedside table, lamp, coffee table, sofa, bookcase, armchair, fridge, cupboard, sink, shower, bath, toilet, dining room
视情况可补充以下词汇：air conditioner, rug, carpet, fan, curtains, cushion, blinds, microwave oven, fork, spoon, plate, dish, washing machine, wardrobe, pillow, sheet, quilt
Ask the students to read these words loudly and try to remember them.
Play a game: give the students different pictures of furniture. Ask them to work in groups of four and try to think out the names of the furniture. Ask less able students in the group to write these words down in their notebooks.
After the students finish writing, choose several students to write down the words of furniture on the blackboard.
Page 12, A. Ask the students to finish this exercise by themselves.
Read these words.
Look at the words on the blackboard. Tell the students that people put the furniture in different rooms. Do you know where to put them?
Ask the students to work in pairs to match furniture and rooms.
Ask the students to finish P12, B. Circle the wrong words and put them into the correct rooms.
Make sentences. The students work in groups of four, one student says: I have a bed in my bedroom. A second student should say like this: I have a bed and a computer in my bedroom. A third student should say: I have a bed, a computer and a lamp in my bed. Each student does it like this. If one student can’t remember the sentence, he will lose the game.
Teacher gives help to the less able students.
Read and remember the words of furniture.
Draw a picture of your own room and write down the words of furniture.
学习*研讨：
What do you call these pieces of furniture? 你把这些家具都称为什么？
furniture意为“家具”，是不可数名词。只能说a piece of furniture（一件家具），two pieces of furniture（两件家具）
教学反思
江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人：陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit1 Dream homes 总课时 9 第 5 课时
课 题 Grammar I 课型 New
教学目标 To use the prepositions of place to talk about object
教学重点 To use the prepositions of place to talk about object
教学难点 To use the prepositions of place to talk about object
课前预习1. Preview the new words.
2. To know the prepositions learnt before.
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step1.
Go over
Step2
Presentation
Step3. Reading
Step4. Practice
Step5 . Practice
Step 6Check the answers.
Step7
Homework Check the preview homework together and solve the students’ problem.
Use the students’ drawings of their own homes. Talk about the furniture. Where is her desk? What’s on the wall?
Let the students ask and answer in pairs: Where does… sit? Talk about the seats in the classroom.
Present and list these prepositions of place on the blackboard.
Talk about Daniel’s classroom with the class. Read the sentences loudly.
Look at the picture on P13, talk about it with the class. What can you see in Kate’s bedroom? Where are her toys? Is there anything under the bed?Ask the students to finish the dialogue by themselves.
Read the dialogue to each other.
1. Talk about Mickey’s room. Ask the students to fill in the blanks.
Look, this is Mickey’s room. He is sitting ____ his armchair. The armchair is ______ the bookcase and the desk. There is a lamp _____ the desk. What’s ____ Mickey? It’s his dog. He is sleeping ___ the floor. There is box ____ the dog, you can see many toys in it. Can you see a yellow toy truck? Yes, it is _____ to the box.
2. Read the passage.
学习*研讨：
1. Millie sits in front of me.米莉座在我的面前。（1）In front of 意为“在---的前面”，是指外部的前面；in the front of意为“在---的前”部，是指内部的前面。如：
There are lots of flowers in front of the
building.大楼的前面有许多花。
There is a blackboard in the front of the classroom.教室的前面有一块黑板。
（2）Before 与in front of都有“在---之前”的意思。但当表示“在建筑物的前面”时，应用in front of，当表示“在某段时间或某件事件之前”时，用Before。如：
The bus stips in front of the shopping mall.公共汽车停在大买场的前面。
You must finish this work before Tuesday.你必须在星期二之前完成这项工作。
2.常见介词的用法。
常见的反义词如下：
1. inside-outside above---below over---under in front of ---behind
（2）between与 among的区别：
between用与两者之间，而三者或三者以上之间用among
教学反思
江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人：陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit1 Dream homes 总课时 9 第 6 课时
课 题 Grammar II 课型 New
教学目标 To revise the cardinal numbers and use them to talk about telephone numbers
To use the ordinal numbers to talk about the dates, the scores and results
教学重点 To revise the cardinal numbers and use them to talk about telephone numbers
To use the ordinal numbers to talk about the dates, the scores and results
教学难点 To revise the cardinal numbers and use them to talk about telephone numbers
To use the ordinal numbers to talk about the dates, the scores and results
课前预习1. Preview the new words.
2. Do the Exercises from Page32 to Page35 by themselves before class.
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step 1
Revision
Step 2. Cardinal numbers
Step3. Practice
Step 4 . Telephone numbers
Step 5 . Writing checks
Step 6 . Ordinal numbers
Step 7. Practice
Step8 Check the answers.
Step9 :
Homework Check the preview homework together and solve the students’ problem.
Revise the cardinal numbers.Teach the students more cardinal numbers. (one hundred, one thousand, one million, one billion, eleven point five). Write these words and numbers on the blackboard. Ask them to read these words and give them more examples.
Write some numbers on the blackboard and ask the students to read them in English.
Go to P14, and ask the students to read the cardinal numbers and finish B1 by themselves. Ask the students to listen to the teacher, and write down the numbers: 598, 7493,…
Tell the students your telephone number in English, and see whether they can write it down in numbers. Ask the students to write down their telephone numbers and try to remember them and say them in English. Go to P15, B2. The students read it and write down the words by themselves.
To P15, B3. Ask the students to finish it in pairs. Read these numbers to each other.
Group work. Ask the students to draw a check and write down the numbers on the check. Then, they should read the numbers to their partners. Their partners should write down the numbers.
Revise the ordinal numbers by talking about dates and birthdays. Write down some words on the blackboard. (first, second, third, fifth, eighth, ninth, twelfth, fifteenth, twentieth, twenty-fourth)
Ask the students to read these words and try to find out the rules.
P16, C1, the students write the numbers out in words.
Talk about Neil’s visit to Beijing with the class. Ask questions: What do Neil and Simon want to do on February, 20th? When do they go to the Summer Palace? Ask them to complete the dialogue on P17. Read the dialogue after the teacher and then read it to each other. Go to P17, C3, talk about the score and then write it out in words.
Check the answers to the exercises
学习*研讨：
1. 序数词 “第一，第二，第三”是特殊：first, second, third从第四开始有规律，大多数直接在基数词后加th。“第几十”请注意，变y为ie再加th。序数词在句中作定语是时一般与定冠词the连用。如：
My teacher is always the first one to get to school.我的老师总是第一个到校。
Our team won the first prize in the football match. 我们队在这次足球比赛中赢得了第一。
序数词前有形容词性物主代词作定语时，省去the
This is my second time to watch the lion dance.这是我第二次看舞狮。
2．I’ll arrive in Beijing on Sunday.我将于周日到达北京。arrive 为不及物动词，意为“到达”若与 in 连用，后面接大地点，若与at 连用后面接小地点。可与get to， reach互换。如：I usually arrive at school at seven o’clock.我通常7点到学校。
3. I can’t wait to see you .我迫不及待要见你。
Can’t wait to do sth意为“迫不及待地做某事”
On the morning of Chinese new year , we can’t wait to put on the new clothes.春节的早上，我们迫不及待要穿上新衣服。
4．That sounds great, Simon.听起来很棒，西蒙。Sound为连系动词，后接形容词作表语意为“听起来”类似的词还有taste , look, feel, smell等。
5．where else are we going ?
where else=what other places
else 常放在what , who, where等疑问词及与 –body, -one, -place, -thing结合而成的不定代词后
1. Review the contents of this lesson.
2. Do the Exx of the workbook.
教学反思
（小周）
篇3：7B Unit 2 备课笔记(译林牛津版七年级英语下册教案教学设计)
一、词组或短语
1 点一些食物 order some food
2 犯了一个错误 make a mistake
3 用钱买… buy…with money
4 比…少 less…than…
5 告诉某人关于某事 tell sb．about sth．
6 京剧 Beijing Opera
7 这样的一幢高楼 such a tall building＝so tall a building
8 去散步 go walking＝go for a walk
9 我们中的人多数 most of us
10 与…靠近be close to
11 乘地铁 by underground（介词短语）
take an underground（动词短语）
12 空气污染 air pollution
13 玩得开心 have a good/great/nice time＝enjoy oneself
=have（lots of) fun
14 国画 Chinese paintings
15 某人在作业方面需要帮助want/need help with one's homework
16 体育运动中心 sports centre
青少年活动中心 youth centre
17 举行一场晚会 hold a party＝have a party
18 一组…；一群… a group of
19 给某人发一封电子邮件 send an e-mail to sb．
20 英国学生中的一个 one of the British/English students
21 艺术品 works of art
22 制定计划 make a plan
23 骑自行车 ride a bike（动词短语）
on a/the/one's bike＝by bike（介词短语）
24 穿好色T恤衫的男孩 the boy in a red T-shirt
25 进行球类运动 play ball games
26 没关系；不要紧。 Never mind．＝It doesn’t matter.＝That's OK.
=That’s all right.
27 别的什么 what else＝what other things
28 让我猜猜 let me guess
29 向某人道谢 say thank you to sb．
向某人问好 say hello to sb．
30 乐一整天／享受一整天 enjoy a full day
31 世界上最好的游戏 the best game in the world
32 带某人参观某地 show sb．around sw.
33 到达最近的城镇 get to the nearest town
34 带某人去某地 take sb. to sw.
35 想起、考虑 think of
36 许多要做的事 lots of things to do
37 住在像这样的地方 live in places like this
38 不必 don’t have to＝needn’t
39 直到晚十点 until ten o’clock at night
40 在北京市中心 in the centre of Beijing
41 （来）对了地方 (be）in the right place
42 选择任何你喜欢的食物 choose any food you like
43 许多西方的餐馆 lots of western restaurants
44 教某人某事 teach sb．sth．
教某人做某事 teach sb．to do sth．
45 当地剧院 local theatre
46 一个给人们看戏或表演的地方 a place for people to watch plays and shows
47 将A与B匹配 match A with B
48 说普通话 speak Putonghua
49 种蔬菜和花 grow vegetables and flowers
二、重点句子及句型
1. There's no dog food. =There isn't any dog food.. 没有狗食了。
2. How many tins of dog food can we buy with that?我们可以用它来买多少罐狗食呢？
3. Maybe we can order a pizza. 也许我们可以去订个比萨饼。
4. Let's take them to the sports center. 让我们把他们带到运动中心去吧。
5. There’s less air pollution in Sunshine Town than in other areas of Beijing.
6. Most of us live in places like this.＝Most of us live in such a place.
7. You can shop until 10 o'clock at night. 你可以购物到晚上＋点。
8. If so, you are in the right place! 如果这样的话，你就来对地方啦！
9. You can choose any food you like in Sunshine Town.
10. That is because you think football is the best game in the world！
11. Don't miss the great exhibitions.可别错过这些精彩的展览。
12. Would you like to go to the Palace Museum tomorrow?你想明天去故宫吗？
13. What time shall we meet in the morning？我们上午什么时候见面？
14. We shall be there at 9 a.m.to enjoy a full day there．
15. I'm going to show you around my hometown.我将带你四处看看我的家乡。
16. It takes about twenty minutes to get to the nearest town．
17. I'm going into town on my bicycle.我将骑自行车进城。
18. I think it is a wonderful place to live(in).我认为它是个很好的居住的地方。
19. The party was really great, wasn't it?这次晚会真的很棒，不是吗？
20. I really like the boy in the red T-shirt. 我真的喜欢那个穿红色T恤衫的男孩。
21. I'm afraid to be late.我怕迟到。
22. I sometimes go swimming in summer when it's warm and sunny.
23. How much does a bottle of orange juice cost? 一瓶橘子汁多少钱啊？
24. Let's take the exchange students to the Congqing restaurant instead!
25. I sent an e-mail to Mr Wu to say thank you because he helped us a lot.
26. That sounds great.
27. Why don't you go visit our local theatre with us?
= Why not go visit our local theatre with us?
= What about going our local theatre with us?
28. There are lots of fun and interesting things to see and to do.
29. I think thirtv of each will be enough.
30. There is nothing (=not anything) on the table now.
三、语法。
1）熟练掌握how much与how many的区别及用法
2) 熟练掌握no和none的用法与区别
3）进一步理解与掌握可数与不可数名词
4) 掌握冠词a, an，the及零冠词的用法。
5）对反意疑问句有初步了解。
7B Unit 2 Welcome to Sunshine Town
Comic Strip
1. Teaching aims and demands:
2. Make suggestions about visiting places and doing activities
e.g. Let's go swimming.
3. Use “How much” and “How many”, “no” and “none” to express quantities .
Warm-up activities
1. Ask students to read Comic Strip. And answer my question “How much money does Eddie have?”
2. Read the dialogue again , then ask them to act it out .
3. Language points
(1).There is no dog food, Eddie!
No=not any
e.g. I have no coats like this .=I don' t have any coats like these.
(2).How many tins of dog food can we buy with that?
我们能用它买多少听狗食？一听也买不了，埃迪。
【辨析】no one, none都表示否定，用法有所不同。
1) none可用来表示人或物，表示“（三个以上）一个也没有”，none常接of，当它做主语时，谓语动词既可用单数也可用复数。当它后接不可数名词的时候，谓语动词只能用单数。
None of us have／has been to the Great Wall. 我们中没有一个人到过长城。
None of the money is Mary's but her twin sister's.
这些钱都不是玛丽的而是她双胞胎姐姐的。
none单独使用时，是用来代替文中提到的特定的人和物，no one和nothing并不指文中提到的人和物。
All of the exchange students were invited，but none（＝not any girl) arrived.
宴请了所有的交流学生，但一个也没来。（如果用no one则意思是不仅交流学生没有来，连其他的人也没有来）
I would like to have some milk. But there is none left in the fridge.
我想喝点牛奶，可是冰箱里一点也没有了。（如果用nothing意思是冰箱里不仅没有牛奶，连其他东西也没有。）
2) no one一般指的是：“没有人”＝nobody.一般不接of短语，做主语时候，谓语动词用单数。
No one knows what will happen tomorrow.没有人知道明天会发生什么事情。
用what, who提问的句子要分别用nothing, on one (nobody)来回答。
用how many, how much提问的句子用none来回答。
一What's in your schoolbag, Millie?一Nothing.
米莉，你的书包里有什么吗？什么都没有。
一Who’s in the classroom? There is still a light lighting in it．
一Nobody. Maybe the student on duty forgot to turn it off．
谁在教室里？还有一盏灯在亮着。没有人，也许是值日的同学忘记关了。
e.g. We write with pens.
(3).Maybe we can order a pizza.（P20）
【辨析】maybe和may be一分一合，但含义和用法却截然不同。
1) maybe是副词，意思是“也许、可能”，在句中做状语，相当于perhaps,常位于句首。
2)在may be中may是情态动词，be是动词原形，两者构成完整的谓语形式。意思是：“也许是，可能是”。
Why doesn’t the little girl like to go to the zoo? Maybe she is afraid of animals．
Why doesn’t the little girl like to go to the zoo？She may be afraid of animals．
这个小女孩为什么不喜欢去动物园？也许她害怕动物。
Where is Mr. Brown? Maybe he is in the office．
Where is Mr. Brown? He may be in the office．
布朗先生在哪里？他可能在办公室。
Welcome to the unit
Teaching aims and demands:
New words: badminton
Teaching aims:
1. To revise vocabulary about activities and places in new situations
2. To make suggestions about visiting different places
Teaching procedures:
1. Ask students to do Part A and B on their own using the information provided in the pictures prompts
2. Ask students about what they can do in their local areas. Then ask them to write four sentences about what they like and could do in their areas.
教后记：
Unit 2 Welcome to Sunshine Town
Reading
Teaching aims and demands:
New words: underground, air, pollution, area, country, lake, building, such, place, like, close, far, hey, until, souvenir, so, western, local, theatre, teach, dirty, take, less
Teaching methods: task-based approach
Teaching task:
1. To read and learn about something about Sunshine Town.
2. To grasp the main idea of each paragraph..
3. Ask students to write an article to introduce their own home town, using the context as a model.
Teaching aids: tape recorder, pictures
Teaching procedures:
1. Ask some students some questions “Are there any tall buildings in your home town?” “What can you do in your town?” , etc…
2. Presentation
(1). Use the pictures to teach the new words.
underground air pollution lake building theatre
(2) Now let's listen to the tape and say “T” or “F” according to the text.
Check the answers with the whole class.
① It takes 40 minutes to walk to the center of Beijing from Sunshine Town.
② There is less air pollution in Sunshine Town.
③ Many students live in tall buildings.
④ There are only two shopping malls in Sunshine Town.
⑤ You can eat Beijing Duck in Sunshine Town.
⑥ You can enjoy Beijing Opera at the theatre.
(3) Ask students to read the text after the tape.
(4)Language points:
① It is only 40 minutes from the center of Beijing by underground.
= It takes 40 minutes to go to Sunshine Town from the center of Beijing by underground.
② There is less air pollution in Sunshine Town than in other areas of Beijing.
阳光城没有北京其他地区污染严重。
less是little的比较级，表示“更少的”意思，用来修饰不可数名词(air pollution)。
比较级十than的句型
Less ... than--→more ... than...
e.g. An elephant is heavier than a horse.大象比马重。
There is less water in this glass than in that one.
I have more books than he.
③ Here is such a tall building. such+a/an+adj.+n.(single)
Look，here is such a tall building.＝here is so tall a building.（P22）
［辨析] so，such都可表示程度，意思是“如此、这样”。
1) so是副词，用来修饰形容词和副词。
He is so excited that he can't say a word.他兴奋得说不出话来。
such是形容词，用来修饰名词。
I have never seen such an interesting book before.我从没有看过如此有趣的书。
2) 在用于单数名词前是，such，so位置不同。
such + a/an +形容词＋单数名词； so十形容词十a/an＋单数名词。
e.g. such a beautiful garden； such an interesting story
It is such an amazing thing＝It is so amazing a thing
3)如果修饰的是不可数名词或名词的复数形式，只可用such,不可用so。
It was such bad weather．天气这么糟糕。
I don't know such things.我不晓得这样的事情。
4）如果不可数名词被much, little,复数名词被many, few等表示量的形容词修饰，只用so,不用such。
He has so many books, his bookshelves are full.他有这么多的书，书架都满了。
5）这是以here开头的一个倒装句，也可以用there。here是一个副词，是不能做主语的。因此，后面的名词或代词才是真正的主语。动词的变化是随着主语的人称和数而决定的。
a: 如果主语是名词，动词在名词前。Here comes the bus.公共汽车来了。
b: 如果主语是代词，则动词放在代词的后面。There he goes.他走了。
④ be close to =be near→ be far from
⑤ We do not have to go far if we want help with our homework
If...... +clause...…，…clause… 如果……，……
［辨析】have to，must都是情态动词，表示“必须”。
have to强调是客观因素要求“不得不，只好”去做，可以用于多种时态（一般不用于进行时），而且有人称和数的变化。用do，does，did等助动词构成疑问和否定式。
一般现在时 一般现在时（三单） 一般过去时 一般将来时
have to has to had to will have to
My mother was ill last Saturday，so I stayed at home and looked after her.
上个星期六妈妈病了，我得留在家里照顾她。
must表示说话人主观认为“应该，必须”，无人称，数和时态的变化。
We must study hard because the future of China belongs to us.
我们必须努力学习因为中国的未来属于我们。
注意：must开头的疑问句，它的否定回答不用mustn't，而用needn't.
Must we finish writing the composition this week? No，you needn't.
我们必须在本周写完这篇作文吗？不必了。
must还可表示猜测，意思是“一定，肯定是”。
He must be in the classroom，I saw him clean the blackboard just now.
他一定在教室里，刚才我看到他在擦黑板。
⑥ You can shop until ten o'clock at night in Star Shopping Mall.（P23）
［辨析】until，till既是介词又是连词。
1）一般情况下可换用，在句首时，只能用until，不能用till。
Until the last minute of the match we tried our best.
直到比赛的最后一分钟，我们都在尽力。
2 ）not…until直到……才……
I didn't go to bed until/till I finished my homework yesterday．
昨天直到做完作业我才上床睡觉。
注意：till(until)只用来引导时间，不能用于指距离。
试译：我们走到树林的尽头。
误：We walked till/until the end of the forest．
正：We walked to the end of the forest.
⑦ We can take you to other shopping malls.（P23）
[辨析] another，the other，others，the others
another泛指三个或三个以上中的另一个。
I don't want this coat. Please show me another.
我不想要这件上衣．请另给我一件。
the other①特指两个中的另一个
He has two sons. One is a worker, the other is a doctor.
他有两个儿子，一个是名工人，另一个是名医生。
②修饰名词，特指另一个、另一些
Tom likes swimming，and the other boys in his class like swimming，too．
汤姆喜欢游泳，他班上的其他男生也喜欢。
others泛指其他的人或物。
He often helps others．他经常帮助他人。
Some are playing basketball, others are playing football.
一些正在打篮球，另外一些在踢足球。
the others特指确定范围内剩下的全部人或物。
There are fifty students in our class．Twenty of them are girls，the others are boys.
我们班有50名学生,20名是女生，其余是男生。
⑧ You can choose any food you like in Sunshine Town.
Any: 任何 you like修饰前面的food
⑨ If so，you are in the right place.
so这样，指前面一句的意思
If so=If you would like to eat Chinese food.
e.g. Tom is a good boy. Do you think so?
⑩ Why don't you visit our local theater with us?
Why don't you do=Why not do
e.g. Why don't you go swimming?
Why not come with me?
○11 Everyone in Sunshine town speaks Putonghua.（P24）
［辨析] every one, everyone虽然词形相同，但词性和意义不尽相同。
everyone是不定代词，当表示“每一个，人人”时，等于everybody，当它们做主语时，谓语动词用单数形式。
every one表示“每一个，人人”时，等同于everyone,,
every one还可以表示“每一个（东西，事情）”,one是代词。
注意：我们可以说every one of them,不可以说everyone of them,
I know every one of them well.我非常了解他们中的每一个人。
He was very hungry，he ate every one of the cakes.他太饿了，把蛋糕都吃光了。
【辨析] every，each都有“每个”的意思。
every十单数名词，表示“每一个”，强调共性、整体，只作定语，形式上为单数，不与of连用。
Every child likes playing games．每个孩子都喜欢玩游戏。
each表示“每一个”，强调个性，作定语主语、宾语和同位语，常与of连用。
Each student was asked to try again．每一个学生都被要求再试一次。
Each of them has a nice skirt.他们每个人都有件漂亮的裙子。
(5) Sum-up
Go through the new words and language points.
Homework
Finish the Ex of Page 24 and 25.
教后记：
Unit 2 Welcome to Sunshine Town
Vocabulary & Grammar
Teaching aims and demands:
New words: waiter, shopper, cashier, sick, hospital, ham, clip, beef, fork, plate, each, loaf, packet, carton, Coke, either, right, thirsty, finger, hold, week, group, exchange
Teaching methods: task-based approach
Teaching task:
1. To develop an understanding of names of occupations and names of related places
2. To use names of places to describe their functions
3. To use “How much” and “How many” to talk about quantities.
4. To use “no” and “none” in the context of quantity.
5. To recognize and use the definite article.
Teaching aids: tape recorder
Teaching procedures:
I . Warm-up
Ask the students to talk about what their parents/uncles...... do
II . Vocabulary
1. Revise the names of occupations and names of related places.
2. Learn new vocabulary and spelling
waiter cook teacher student doctor nurse shopper cashier
restaurant school hospital supermarket
III. Grammar
1. Revise the key vocabulary about food items
Ask students to identify countable and uncountable nouns of food.
2 . Complete the sentences
How many +countable nouns(pl.)
How much + uncountable nouns
e.g. How many apples do you need?
How many eggs do you have?
How much Coke do you need?
3. What else do we need?（P28）
［辨析】else，other都表示“别的、其他的”
else做形容词用在疑问代词who, what和不定代词something, anything, nothing, nobody, anybody后做定语，else做副词用在疑问副词when, where后面做状语。
I love this park very much. When else shall we come again?
我太喜欢这个公园了。我们什么时候再来呢？
other做形容词常用在名词或代词one，,one s的前面做定语。
I can't answer your question. You'd better ask some other people.
我不能回答你的问题，你最好问问别的什么人吧。
I prefer this film to the other one.两部电影相比较我更喜欢这部。
4. Complete the conversation with “no” or “none”
(1) no =not any no +noun.
e.g. She has no friends.
No ones knows.
There is no water in the glass at all.
(2) none prep.没有人或没有东西
e.g. None of them are listening to you.
Is there any time left? No, none at all.
5. The article “a” , “an” , “the”
（1）表示某人（事物）某一种类
My father is a driver.
Do you like an apple or a pear?
（2）表示某一事物中的任何一个
An elephant is bigger than a horse
A monkey can climb trees.
（3）表示某人某物，但不具体说明何人何物
A student from Class Two runs fastest.
A man is calling now.
（4）表示数量有”一”的含义
There is a book on the desk.
A panda has a mouth，a nose and two eggs．
（5）用于固定词组
half an hour, a lot of, have a rest, a moment ago
（6）上文提过，下文重复
I have a new pen. The pen is a present from my dad.
（7）世界上独一无二的事物 the sun，the moon
（8）序数词前，表示方位的名词前，形容词最高级前the first, in the south, the best
（9）乐器名词前 play the piano
（10）在复数姓氏前
The Browns(=the Brown family) are going to Shanghai for a holiday.
（11）一些形容词前表示一类人the rich，the old
（12）专有名词不和习惯用语中
the Great Wall, by the way, in the morning
（13）不用冠词的情况
附：不用冠词情况的口诀。
下列情况不用冠，名词前面代词限。复数名词表泛指，球类学科和三餐。
专有名词不可数，星期月份季节前。交通手段和节日，国名称谓和头衔。
①节日，星期．月份，季节，年，学科前 in summer, in August, on Sunday
②一些专有名词，不可数名词，称呼和头衔前
China, Grade Two，Mr. Li, Dr. Liu
③表示颜色，语种和国家前in purple, Japanese, England
④一些短语中
have breakfast, play football
Language Points:
C2 : The party was really great，wasn't it?（P31）
反意疑问句构成：若叙述部分为肯定句，则疑问部分用否定形式；若叙述部分为否定句，则疑问句部分用其肯定结构。回答要么都是肯定要么都是否定。
一The twins won’t go to the Summer Palace the day after tomorrow，will they？
一Yes，they will.一No，they won't．
构成反意疑问句的前一部分的陈述句要同后一部分的简短疑问句的主谓语在时、体、人称和数上都要保持一致。The film is very exciting，isn’t it．
关于反意疑问句的构成，有以下几点值得注意：
1.如果陈述部分包含有否定形容词no, little, few,否定副词no, seldom, never,否定代词few, little，none，no one，nobody，nothing时，疑问部分用其肯定形式。
My grandpa has never been abroad，has he？
Few people know the accident，do they？
2.当陈述部分是there一存在句时，附加疑问部分的主语也用there。例如：
There is no meat in the fridge，is there？
3.当陈述部分的主句是I think，I believe等结构时，附加疑问部分则与that一分句中的主语和谓语动词保持对应关系，但要注意否定的转移。
I think Tom runs fastest of all，doesn’t he？
I don't think John is a good student，is he?
4.祈使句的反意疑问句往往在陈述部分之后加will you:
Don’t shout at others，will you?
以let开头，其后跟us时有两种拼写方式，其反意疑问句也不同：
Let's go home now, shall we?我们现在回家吧，好吗？
Let us go home now, will you?让我们回家，行吗？
IV. Discussion (task)
Have a discussion and find out the use of the article.
V. Homework
1. Review the contents of this lesson.
2. Do the Ex of the workbook.
教后记：
Unit 2 Welcome To Sunshine Town
Integrated skills and Study skills:
Integrated skills:
Teaching aims and demands:
1. To listen for detail and abstract information about making arrangements.
2. To order information from a tour guide's introduction.
Teaching procedures:
I . Bring some pictures about famous local places to class. Ask a few very general questions. “Do you like the place?” “Have you visited there?” .
II . Go through some key vocabulary items in Part A 1 &A2: exhibitions, golden, thrones, pottery
III. Tell students to fill in the table in Part A2 carefully, then check the answers.
IV. Notes
Baohe Palace---works of art
这里的works作可数名词，是“作品”，“著作”的意思，而work作为不可数名词是“工作”之意，
e.g. I like reading the works of Shakespeare.
At last I found work in the city.
V. Explain to students that they will listen to a tour guide's introduction.
Listen to the recording. Ask them to do the task on their own first., then check answers.
VI. Ask students to read Simon's notes in Part A4. Play the recording again and ask students to complete Part A4. Check answers as a class.
Part B
I. Read after the tape.
II. Two students in a pair and role-play the conversation
III. Ask students to make a new dialogue. Using the dialogue in Part B as a model.
IV. Talk to students about making arrangements.
e.g. visiting friends, going to cinema, going to a restaurant.
Pronunciation
I .Teaching aims
To recognize the number of syllables in a word from listening and reading.
II. Teaching the new material
1. Talk to students about the sound and intonation of English.
2. Say a few simple words which students know well. Ask students how many beats they can hear.
girl, boy, dog, home
tea.cher, bro.ther, sis.ter, stu.dent,
to.mor.row, yes.ter.day, cin.e.ma
3. Go through the examples in Part A
4. Listen to the tape and write the number of syllables they hear for the words in Part B.
5. Check answers.
6. Ask students to do the puzzle in Part C.
7. Play the recording for Part D. After checking the answers, ask more able students to write the number of syllables they hear
教后记：
Unit 2 Welcome To Sunshine Town
Main task & Checkout
Teaching aims and demands:
Teaching methods: task-based approach
Teaching task:
1. To become familiar with a new text-script.
2. To organize language and descriptions to achieve interest.
3. To read a video script to the class.
4. To assess recognition of things we can find in a town.
Teaching procedures:
I . Warm-up
Ask the student to have a free talk.
II . Main task (Part A)
1. Talk to students about the purpose of writing a video script. It is important to engage students' interest at this stage as free writing takes a lot of courage.
2. Encourage them to bring in pictures, and make sketches and drawings to go with their texts.
3. Tell students that they need to organize pictures and text. They can use the planning notes on Page 35 as a guide.
4. Go through the notes under “Town” and ask students to choose 2 or 3 items.
5. Ask students to describe some items on the “things to do” list, e.g.
where they can do things and how they feel about it.
6. Ask students to write about their home town. Ask students to focus on writing for a specific audience, the British exchange students.
7. Then ask students to work on their own to number the items in the order of how much they like each item. Next, ask them to write down on the right side of the paper some reasons.
III. Main task (Part B)
1. Ask students to work in pairs. Have them read John' s video script in Part B 1 and discuss his home town. Then invite comments, e.g. Do you and your partner like John's home town? Why?/Why not? Would you and your partner like to visit it? Why?/Why not?
2. Ask students to plan their own video script using the questions in Part B2 as a reference.
3. students rewrite their video scripts on a separate sheet of paper and add illustrations.
Language Points:
B1: I hope you can come and visit soon.（P36）
【辨析】 hope，wish
hope“希望”，表示实现可能性很大的希望，后面可接动词不定式或从句。
He hopes to be a doctor.我希望成为医生。
I hope she will be well again．我希望她会痊愈。
注意：“希望某人做某事”，英语习惯上不说hope sb. to do sth.
试译：我希望你早点回来。
误：I hope you to come back early. 正：I hope you will come back early
wish意为“希望”，“愿望，’，后面接不定式或“代词（名词）＋不定式”结构，所表示的希望大体是可以实现的。
We wish you to be happy.我们希望你幸福。
注意：wish也接从句，表示的希望不太可能实现，从句中谓语动词用虚拟语气。
I wish I could fly to the moon in a spaceship one day.
但愿有一天我能乘宇宙飞船飞向月球。
wish还可接双宾语，表示“祝愿”，hope则没有这种用法。
Let's wish you a long life．祝你长寿。
IV: Checkout (Part A)
1. Ask students to write down the key language items they learned in this unit. Ask some of them to write on the blackboard.
2. Ask students to read the gapped conversation first before completing the sentences. It's important for them to have a general understanding of text and the context.
3. Set a time limit. To encourage students to read the conversation before writing.
4. Check the answers.
V. Checkout (Part B)
1. Tell students about word-search puzzles if they are unfamiliar with them.
2. Set a time limit of 5-10 minutes.
3. Ask more able students to make a word snake of their own.
教后记：
篇4：牛津7B Unit 3 Finding your way(译林牛津版七年级英语下册教案教学设计)
Welcome to the unit
Teaching aims and demands:
New words: follow, north, north-west, south-west
Teaching methods: task-based approach
Teaching task: 1. To introduce the topic of places and transport.
2. To talk about visits and means of transport using model sentences.
Teaching aids: tape recorder
Teaching procedures:
Ⅰ. Warm-up (presentation)
Ask the students on duty to give us a short report about the Sunshine Town.
Ⅱ. Listening
Listen to the tape, answer my question, “Did Hobo, in fact, know the way?” Help the Ss to answer.
Listen again, Ss read after the tape recorder, then do some True or False exercises. Check the answers with the whole class.
Language points:
1. follow me
2. go up and down
e.g. Let’s go down the hill together.
3. Don’t be afraid.
e.g. (1) Don’t be late for school.
(2) Don’t play in the street. It’s too dangerous.
be afraid to do. be afraid of sth.. I’m afraid that+从句
e.g. (1) The little girl is afraid to go out in the evening.
(2) Little Tom is afraid of dogs.
(3) I’m afraid that I can’t go with you. I have a lot of work to do.
Ⅲ. Main task
Introduce the topic of place and transport.
Ⅳ. Discussion (task)
Talk about visits and means of transport using the model sentence ‘---Let’s go to the zoo
.---OK. We can go by bus.
Language points:
1. The zoo is north of Beijing Sunshine Secondary School.
north of
south, west, north-west, south-west
e.g. The library is south of the classroom.
The playground is west of the classroom.
2. ---How do we get there?
---We can go by bus.
by air/bus/car/bike/underground
Ⅴ.Sum-up
Go through the new words and the language points during this lesson.
Ⅵ. Homework
.Review the contents of this lesson.
教后记：
7B Unit3 Finding your way
Reading
Teaching aims and demands:
New words: call, robber, drive, quickly, at once, police, uniform, just, push, van, away, fail, use, knife, work, police station, route, along, right, another, stop, traffic, light, jump, later, suddenly, surprised, catch, in the end, crossroads
Teaching methods: task-based approach
Teaching task: 1. Prepositions of movement..
2. Simple future tense with “shall” “will”
Teaching aids: tape recorder, tapes, slide projector, slides
Teaching procedures:
Ⅰ. Warm-up
Ask the Ss to give a free talk. .
Ⅱ.Listening
Now, listen to the text, please answer the question “Did the robbers run away finally?”
Listen again, Ss read after the tape, and do some exercises.
Ⅲ. Reading
Ss read the articles by yourselves. Do the Exx on Page41and 42. Check the answers with the whole class.
Language points:
1.nearby=not far away
e.g. I live nearby in the building.
2. robber(n.) rob(v.)
e.g. The two robbers ran away from the back quickly.
3. quickly=fast (adj.) quick (adj.)
e.g. She walked quickly away.
4. fail失败
e.g. Tom failed in his math examination.
5. work起作用
e.g. Something is wrong with my watch. It doesn’t work..
6. route路线take different route
e.g. There’s another route you can take to get to the cinema.
7. suddenly突然地.
e.g. Suddenly I found a big tiger standing in front of me.
8.surprised adj. 惊讶地
e.g. We are surprised to hear him sing.
9.in the end =at last
e.g. He passed the exam in the end.
10.turn right/left into 7th Street
e.g. Don’t tell a lie any more . It’s not good for you.
Ⅴ.Discussion (task)
Have a discussion about the story.
Ⅵ.Sum-up
Go through the new words and the language points learnt during this lesson.
Ⅶ. Homework
Review the contents of this lesson.
教后记：
Unit3 Finding your way
Vocabulary ﹠ Grammar
Teaching aims and demands:
New words: straight, zebra crossing, entrance, correct, corner, road, hotel, cross, across, round, off, onto, train, tunnel, stair, railway, south, step, side, bridge, join, win, cloudy, paper, campfire
Teaching difficulties: 1.prepositions of movement
2. simple future tense with “will” and “shall”
Teaching methods: task-based approach
Teaching task: 1.To learn and know about the directions
2.To prepositions of movement to give directions
3.To recognize the use of “will” and “shall” and be going to talk about the future
Teaching aids: tape recorder
Teaching procedures:
Ⅰ. Warm-up
Help the Ss retell the story “A lucky escape”.
Ⅱ. Vocabulary
1.Ask the students what road signs they know, and list the names of the signs: e.g. turn left, traffic light, turn right, straight on ,crossroads.
2. Ask the students to write the names under the pictures.
3. Ask them how to read a map and circle the letters of the correct maps.
Language points:
turn right/left, cross the road, go straight along the road.
Ⅲ.Grammar
1.Prepostitions of movement
We use prepositions of movement to express movements. Prepositions of movement: across, along, down, from, into, off, onto, out of, over, round, through, to, up
e.g. The bus goes to the airport.
Simon is swimming across the pool.
A train is going through a tunnel.
Millie is walking along the road.
Kitty is climbing up the hill.
Hobo is walking round the table.
Work out the rule: We use prepositions of movement after the verbs.
Finish off the exercise on Page45.
2. Simple future tense with “will” and “shall”
We use “will” or “shall” when we talk about: things that will happen, plans that we are making now.
e.g. She will be late for the party.
We will take the dog to the park tomorrow.
We make negative sentences like this:
I/We will not/shall not go
He/She/It/You/They will not go
We ask questions using the simple future tense like:
Will/shall I/We like go?
Will He/She/It/You/They like go?
We answer questions like this:
Yes, I/we will/shall. Yes, he/she/it/you/they will.
No, I/we will not/shall not. No, he/she/it/you/they will not.
We can use “be going to” when we talk about:
Fixed plans for a certain time in near future.
e.g. I’m going to take another route.
Things that will probably happen.
e.g. It’s so cloudy. I think it is going to rain.
We ask and answer questions with “be going to” like this.
Am I
Are you/we/they going to see the doctor tomorrow?
Is he/she/it
I am. I am not.
Yes, you/we/they are. No, you/we/they are not.
he/she/it is. he/she/it is not.
Ⅳ. Discussion (task)
Have a discussion and find out the differences between the simple future tense and simple present tense.
Ⅴ.Homework
1. Review the contents of this lesson.
2. Do the Exx of the workbook.
教后记：
Unit3 Finding your way
Integrated skills and Study skills
Teaching aims and demands:
Key points: Cross the bridge and turn right
Take the second turning on the right.
Cross the road at the traffic light.
Walk past the police station.
Teaching methods: task-based approach
Teaching task: 1.To recognize key expressions about directions.
2.To use key information given instruction and undentify the specific order of them from listening.
3. To produce formulatic responses to specific instruction.
Teaching aids: tape recorder, tapes, slide projector, slides
Teaching procedures:
Ⅰ. Warm-up
Ask the student on duty to give a short talk.
Integrated skills
Ⅱ.Finding treasure
1.Ask the Ss to study the pictures in Part 1 carefully. Put a tick in the correct boxes. Check the answers and explain.
2.Listen to the tape and tell the Ss to do the Exx on Page48and 49. Listen again if necessary. Check the answers with the whole class.
Ⅲ. Speak up
1.Listen to the tape recording and read after it.
2.Ask the Ss to work in pairs to make up a new conversation for giving direction using the conversation in Part B as a model. Ask a few pairs to present their conversations to the whole class.
Ⅶ. Study skills ( Making a grammar pattern book)
Take the Ss through the text of this page. Have a discussion about the Internet. What does WWW stands for? Do you know any common browser name, some search engines. Talk about other key aspects about the Internet.
Language points:
1.Cross the bridge and turn right
2.Take the second turning on the right.
3.Walk along a path.
Ⅷ. Sum-up
Go through the new words and the language points learnt during this lesson.
Ⅸ. Homework
1. Review the contents of this lesson.
2. Do the Exx of the workbook.
教后记：
Unit3 Finding your way
Main task ＆ Checkout
Teaching aims and demands:
New words: farewell, barbecue, picnic, invite, exit, everybody, complete, note, page, yours faithfully, monitor, signature, postcard, footbridge
Teaching methods: task-based approach
Teaching task: 1. To express direction and information in the contest of writing a letter of invitation.
2.To check the use of prepositions of movement, the use of “will” and “be going to” to talk about the future giving of direction.
Teaching aids: tape recorder, tapes, slide projector, slides
Teaching procedures:
Ⅰ. Warm-up
Ask the student on duty to give a free talk.
Ⅱ. Main task
Ask the Ss to read the questionnaire, then complete it with students’ own information.
Ask the Ss to read the letter on their own and complete it with information from the questionnaire results on Page51.
Ask the Ss some questions to check them.
Ⅲ. Writing (task)
Ask the students to write an invitation letter for your class’s farewell party at your school. Draw a map and send it with your letter with the help of B2.
Ⅳ. Checkout: Sending postcards
Ask the Ss to fill in the blanks with the correct forms of verbs and prepositions. Check the prepositions of movement and simple future tense.
Ⅴ. Words
Ask the Ss to look at the picture and write the correct words to describe each picture.
Language points:
1. be + adj. + to do
e.g. He is sad to fail in the exam.
2.invite sb. to do sth.
e.g. invite us to her home
Lily invited us to have dinner at her home yesterday.
3. yours faithfully
4. send the postcard to my parents.
Ⅷ. Sum-up
Go through the new words and the language points learnt during this lesson.
Ⅸ. Homework
1. Review the contents of this lesson.
2. Do the Exx of the workbook.
教后记：
篇5：7B第五单元学案 (译林牛津版英语七年级)
聚智堂名师教育辅导教案
学员姓名： 杨振宏 年 级： 初一 课 时 数：3
辅导科目：英 语 学科教师： 张慧
授课主题 7B 第五单元
授课日期及时段 5月28日（周三）
教学内容
1. mine pron. 我的
mine 是名词性物主代词，用在句子中代替名词。而my是形容性物主代词，只能在句子中表示“某人的”。
例句：This book is mine, that one is yours . 这本书是我的，那一本书是你的。
根据句意及汉语提示，写出单词的正确形式。
Lily’s parents are both doctors while _____ (我的) are both teachers.
答案:mine
批注：学生成绩较差的孩子也可以把下面的物主代词重新复习一下：
类型 我的 你的 他（她、它）的 我们的 你们的 他们的
形容词性物主代词 my your his(her, its) our yours their
名词性物主代词 mine yours his(hers, its) ours yours theirs
2. nothing pron.. 没有什么
nothing 是不定代词，用在句子中代替物体，意为“没有什么”，具有否定意义，相当于not anything。
例：We know nothing about the history of Sunshine Town. 我们对阳光城的历史一无所知。
I think _____ can make Andy change his mind. He is such a person who never gives up easily.
A. somethingB. anything C. nothing D. everything
答案: C
批注：本题考察句子理解和词义辨析。分析句子意思和四个选项，
填入nothing”没有什么“符合题意：“我觉得没有什么能使安迪改变主意，
他是一个不会轻易放弃的人”。
拓展：
当所指代的对象不确定时，就叫做不定代词。
如：something, anything, everyone, somebody.等等
它们在句首作主语时，谓语用单数，修饰语放在代词后面。
比如something important, someone unlucky
3. quiet adj. 安静的，寂静的
quiet 用作形容词，修饰人等有生命物体时表示“安静的”之意，修饰地方、时间、海洋大地时表示“寂静”之意。
常用be quiet “安静”；keep quiet “保持安静”；a quiet sea “平静的海洋”等。后加ly 构成副词形式。
例：I am walking in the quiet street.我行走在宁静的街道上。
-You are so ______ ,Helen, what’s wrong?
-Oh ,I just feel a little tired and don’t want to say anything.
A. polite B. busy C. quiet D. excited
答案: C
4. fresh adj. 新鲜的
fresh 用作形容词，意思是“新鲜的”。常指空气、水、水果、蔬菜、鱼、肉等“新鲜的”，也可以指人的思维、人的言行是“新鲜的”、不同凡响。
例：The vegetable on the table are all fresh.
Black tea was invented in China as to keep tea _______ (新鲜的) when it was transported long distances.
答案: fresh
批注：本题考察句子理解和单词辨析，句子意思是“为了保持长途运输中茶叶新鲜，红茶在中国被发明出来了”。“新鲜的”需要用fresh 的原形填入空白处。
fresh也可以作“精神饱满的,生气勃勃的”解时,是表语形容词,指人不觉得累、积极的、精神饱满的,也可指老年人像年轻人一样生气勃勃。
5. jogging n. 慢跑锻炼
jogging 是由动词jog 双写g加上ing 变成的动名词，表示“慢跑锻炼”之意。常用go jogging “去慢跑锻炼”；
do some jogging “慢跑锻炼”等。
例：Jogging is important for some old people.对于一些老年人来说，慢跑锻炼很重要。
My father has a habit of__________(jog) along the river in the morning .
答案: jogging
批注：本题考查句意理解和单词拼写。of 是介词，后接表示行为的动词jog时，
这个动词要用动名词形式jogging。句子意思是“我爸爸有早晨沿着河慢跑锻炼的习惯”。
6. famous adj. 出名的，著名的
famous 用作形容词，表示“出名的，著名的”，可以用作表语、定语、宾语补足语等句子成分。
可以构成be famous for “因…….（某事）而出名/著名”。
be famous as “因…….（身份）而出名/著名”。
例：Su Yang is famous because of swimming . 孙杨因为游泳而出名了。
The girl became _______ (出名) after she sang the English songs in our school.
答案: famous
批注：相似的词组be well-known for “因…….（某事）而出名/著名” be well-known as “因…….（身份）而出名/著名”。
7. miss vt. 错过，失去
miss用作及物动词，表示“错过,失去”之意，后面可以跟名词、代词作宾语，后接动词时，要用v+ing 形式。
例：It’s easy to miss way in the forests. 在森林中很容易迷路。
-Are you going to take part in the speech competition?
-That’s for sure. It’s too good a chance to __________.
A. haveB. take C. change D. miss
答案: D
批注：
losing adj. 损失的,输的
n. 失败,损失
例 Losing the match make quite a dent in his ego.
lost adj. 失去的,遗失的,迷惑的
v. 遗失,损失,失败
例 She looked out of the window, sighing for her lost youth.
1. postcard n 明信片.
(1) postcard用作名词，表示“明信片”之意，可数，其复数形式是postcards.
例：I ask him to send a postcard to the exchange student. 我请他寄一张明信片给那位交流生。
根据句子意思和汉语提示，写出句子中所缺的单词。
It is a polite way to send a ______ (明信片) to your friend before Christmas Day..
答案: postcard
批注: 老师在讲解这个单词的时候可以拓展一下合成词构成法：
合成指由两个或多个单词合成一个新词。
如：afternoon, birthday, blackboard, bathroom, newspaper, airplane, classmate, grandfather 等类似的单词。
2. key n 钥匙，答案，键，关键
key用作名词，意为“钥匙；答案；关键”，其复数形式是keys。
（1） key表示“钥匙”之意时，常用a key to the door “这个门的钥匙”固定搭配。
例：I don’t have the key to the front door.我没有前门的钥匙。
（2） key表示“答案”之意时，常用the key to the question “这个问题答案”固定搭配。
例：I know the key to the first question.我知道第一个问题的答案。
（3） key表示“键”之意时，是指电脑、打字机、钢琴等“键盘上”的“键”。
例:There are six rows of keys on the keyboard.这个键盘上有六排键。
（4） key 也可以用作名词，表示“关键”性的人或人事。
例：The man may the key of the school.那个人可能是这个学校的关键人物。
The _______ (键) on the keyboard is broken. I don’t know what to do with it .
答案:key
批注：本题考查句意理解和单词拼写。句意为“键盘上的这个键坏了，我不知道怎么处理”，句子中的动词用的是单数形式is，“键”要用单数形式key.
当key作“答案”讲，固定搭配是the key to the question，其近义词是the answer to the question.
3.ring n 环，圈；戒指
（1）ring用作名词，表示“环；圈；戒指”，是可数名词，其复数形式是rings。
例：The ring on the table is not mine. 桌子上的指环不是我的。
（2）ring用作名词，也可以表示“打电话”之意，常用give sb. a ring “给某人打电话”固定搭配。
例：He often give me a ring on Sunday. 他经常星期天给我打电话。
---Wish you a pleasure journey!
---Thanks! I’ll give you a ________ as soon as I arrive in Paris.
A .ring B .hand C .ride D. present
答案: A
批注：本题考查句子意思理解和词义辨析，对话上句意为“祝你旅途愉快！”答语 “谢谢！我一到巴黎就给你…….”比较四个选项和对话意思，只有“打电话”符合题意。
4. all over 到处，遍及
（1） all over 表示“到处”之意时，与副词everywhere 意义接近。
例：The child are wet all over.孩子们全身都湿透了。
（2） all over 表示“遍及”之意时，相当于介词throughout ,后面要接名词、代词等作宾语：
all over the world “全世界”.
例：Great changes have taken place all over China. 全中国已经发生了巨大的变化。
汉译英
全世界的儿童都喜欢看电视。（all over）
________________________________________________
答案:The children all over the world enjoy watching TV .
批注：本题考查运用所给的单词或短语翻译句子。
用all over the world 表示“全世界”;enjoy /like watching TV。
5. raise vt 饲养，使升高
（1） raise ，及物动词，表示“饲养”，后接“饲养”的动物名称。
例： My mother raises lots of pigs. 妈妈养了很多猪。
（2） raise ，及物动词，也可表示“使升高”，后接“使升高”的人、物等。
例：He raises his voices at last。 最后他提高了声音。
---As the curtain_______，the famous singer came out.
---The fans _____and screamed.
A .was raised; rose B .had been raised ;were raised
C .rose; were raised D. had risen; raised
答案: A
批注：[辨析] rise, raise
rise（rose, risen）vi. 上升，升起, 升高；上涨；站起来。说明主语自身移向较高位置，常用于日、月、云、雾、烟、蒸汽、河水、温度、物价以及人的职位等，无被动语态。 如：
The moon has risen above the hills. 月亮已经从山上升起。
The river has risen by several meters. 河水上涨了好几米。
raise vt. 举起，提起；抬高；筹集。说明主语发出的动作是要作用于其它事物的，往往有使物体达到其应有的高度的含义。可用于被动语态。如：
Heavy rain raised the river stage. 暴雨使河水水位升高。
The boss promised to raise her salary.老板答应要给她加薪水。
典例讲解：
I. 用上述动词的正确形式完成下列句子。
1. He ______ and walked to the window.
2. He ______ his hat to me as a sign of respect.
3. The birds also attack crops when the opportunity ______.
4. The people’s living standard has greatly been ______.
5. Her temperature is still ______.
Key:
I. 1. arose / rose 2. raised3. Arises 4. raised 5. rising
6.drive vt & vi 驾车送(人)，驾驶
drive用作及物动词，意为“驾车送(人),驾驶”，后接人时,表示“驾车送”，后接车时,表示“驾驶”。
例1 I’ll drive you to the cinema now. 我现在就驾车送你们到学校去。
例2 My father drives me school every day.我爸爸每天驾车送我去学校。
The old man began learn to ______ a car at the age of sixty. Now he is a driver..
A .buy B .take C .get D. drive
答案: D
批注：成绩比较好的学生老师在讲课的时候可以拓展到下面的一些有关drive的短语。
drive off 驱散, 击退, 赶走 drive at 意指, 打算 drive out 逐出, 乘车出去, drive away (把车)开走, 赶走
drive home 开车送回家, 传达
7.smell vt. 嗅，闻到 n. 气味
（1）smell用作及物动词，表示“嗅，闻到”之意。后面直接跟被闻到的人或物。
例 The man smells the fish on the table.
（3） smell 用作名词，表示“气味”，指物体的气味时，不可数；表示各种各样的气味的时候，是可数名词。
例1 Some flowers have strong smells.
例2 The smell from the meat is very bad.
根据句子意思和汉语提示，写出下列句子中所缺的单词。
The _____________(气味) of the flower is inviting to bees.
答案: smell
批注：本题句子意思是“花香正吸引蜜蜂飞来”，某物的气味气味应该使用单数。
一、根据句意和汉语注释或音标，在空格内写出各单词的正确形式： （10分）
1. There ______ (be) lots of things to do and places to go in Shanghai.. are
2. does your brother enjoy ______ (shop) in Sunshine Town . shopping
3. Liu Xiang is a _______ (著名的) player famous
4. I ‘m looking forwards to ________ (meet ) with my friends . meeting .
5. Why not let them ______ (play ) football in the street. Play
二、根据句意及汉语或首字母提示，写出句中所缺单词。(10分)
1. I can buy some (明信片)for you on my way back.
2. Nick doesn’t know the（答案）to the question .网]
3. Miss Lee’s (戒指) is nice, She buy it from the supermarket.
4. My (笔袋) is old, I want to buy anew one .
5. Your bike is not here. You can use (我的) .
答案: 1. postcards 2.key 3. ring 4. pencil case 5. mine
1. A friend of mine is coming to visit me, Hobo. 霍波，我的一个朋友将要来拜访我。
(1) a friend of mine“我的一个朋友”，mine 是名词性物主代词，a friend of 与后面的名词是“部分关系”，因此后面的名词用复数形式my friends.
例：Millie is a friend of mine.米莉是我的一个朋友。
（2）is coming 用的是现在进行时形式，表示将来将要发生的动作，意思是“将要来”。可以用现在进行时态表示将来动作的有come, leave, stay, arrive, go 等表示位移的动词。
例：I’m leaving for Shanghai tomorrow.我明天就要动身去上海了。
---Who is the girl sitting in the front of the classroom?
---She is a friend of ______.
A. mine B. me C.I D. my
答案: A
批注：本题考察对话理解和词义辨析。根据对话意思和介词of的要求，所填的词必须用宾格形式，如果填写me，“a friend of me “不含部分关系，因此只能填“mine”。
2. ---Shall we take them to the cinema? 我们带他们去看电影，好吗？。
----Sure, We can watch some wonderful films together。当然可以，我们可以一起看一些精彩的影片。
（1） Shall we do sth ?征求意见的句子，同Let’s do sth, shall we?/ why not do sth ?/ what about doing sth? 以及How about doing sth ?
其肯定应答句常用 It sounds great! /That’s a good ideal./ Of course 等；其否定应答句常用Sorry/No +否定理由。
(2) take sb to some place.意为“把某人带到某地去”。
例：I will take you to New York tomorrow. 明天我将带你去纽约。
---Tom, can you ______ these books _______ the school library?
---OK, Mr Green.
A. bring, to B. take, to C. carry, to D. put, to
答案: B
批注：本题考查句意理解和词义辨析。
根据句意得知，表示“把某物带到……”，要用固定搭配 take sth .to ……。
3. There are lots of things to do in Sunshine Town.在阳光城有好多事情可以做。
句中to do 是动词不定式，用作后置定语（动词不定式用作定语必须后置），修饰前面的名词，表示要做的事。
例： Eddie has no food to eat。埃迪没有吃的了。
Many students say they have no time ___________TV in the evening because of too much homework.
A. watch B. watches C. to watch D. watching
答案:C
批注：本题考察句意理解和动词不定式做定语的用法。分析句子结构，句子中缺少动词不定式to watch 坐定语，修饰time,“许多学生说因为太多的家庭作业他们晚上没有观看电视的时间”。
4. Sunshine Town is not far from the centre of Beijing . 阳光城离北京市中心不远。
far away from ….表示“离…远”；可以与连系动词连用，也可以与行为动词连用。
例：Mr Green lives far away from our school.格林小姐居住得离学校远。
汉译英
长城离山东不是很远。（far from…..）
____________________________________________
答案:The Great Wall is not far from Shangdong.
批注：本题考查句子翻译。句子表示的是客观事实，用一般现在时态；句子的主干是 far from ….。因此本题应该译成The Great Wall is not far from Shangdong.
5. It takes only 40 minutes by underground .乘地铁只需要40分钟。
本句是由it take sb some time to do sth 演变而来，这是一个常用的重要句型。意为“（某人）花多少时间（做某事）”或（做某事）花费（某人）多少时间”，it 是句子的形式主语，真正主语是后面的动词不定式。这种句型与“sb spends some time on sth.” 或”sb spends some time (in) doing sth.” 意义相同。如：
It take me an hour to do my homework..
= I spend an hour doing my homework. 我花一个小时做我的家庭作业。
It _______ us about an hour to get to the Yangzhou-Taizhou airport from Yangzhou by bus.
A. spends B. pays C. takes D. gets
答案: C
批注：本题考察句意理解和固定句型。分析句子结构，本句所用的是It takes sb some time to do sth..
6. We are looking forward to meeting you soon。我们期盼着尽快与你相见。
Look forward to 是一个固定短语，意为“期盼，盼望”。to 是介词，后接名词、代词和v+-ing形式，不能跟动词原形。
例：I’m looking forward to seeing you.我在盼望着与你见面。
I haven’t seen my grandma for a long time. I’m looking forward to _____ (visit ) her soon.
答案: visiting
批注：本题考察句意理解和固定句型。分析句子结构，本句所用的是look forward to doing sth 因此，句中的visit 要变为visiting ..
1. I would like to take the boys to our school’s football field. 我想要把这些男孩带到我们学校的足球场去。
take sb to sp . 意为“带某人到某地去”。动词take 表示“引领，带领”之意。
例： I’ll take you to the playground , 我将要带你去运动场。
完成句子，根据所给汉语句子完成英语句子。
米莉会把你带到学校图书馆去的，你不要担心
________________________________________________________
答案: Millie will take you to the school library ,Don’t worry.
批注：本题考察根据固定搭配完成句子。句子中的 “把你带到图书馆去”用的是take sb to sp 固定搭配。
可以拓展有关take的短语如：
take care 照顾 take away 带走 take off 起飞;脱下 take a holiday 度假
2. Neil’s mother is calling him from the UK.尼尔的母亲正在从英国给他打电话。
call 用作动词，与telephone 用法一样表示“打电话给某人”。常用call sb from sp “从某地打电话给某人“。
例 ：I will call you from my new flat this afternoon.今天下午我将从我的新公寓打电话给你。
How often do you write a letter to your father?
I seldom or never do that now. I ____________or email him almost everyday.
A. speak B. cry C. shoutD. call
答案: D
批注：考察句意理解和词义辨析，上句“你多久写一次信给你的爸爸？，答语“现在我很少或从不写信了，几乎是每天。。。。。。。或给他发电子邮件。”比较四个选项，D选项比较符合题意。
3. You can learn all about old China at the museum.你在这个博物馆里可以了解有关旧中国的一切。
learn sth about sth or sb 了解有关某物或某人的事情。
例: We learn much about the Great Wall. 我们了解到有关长城的许多情况
I am looking forwards to ___________ more about your school life.
A. learningB. listening C. hearing from D. looking at
答案: A
批注：本题考察句意理解和词义辨析。句意是“我正期盼这更多地…….你的学校生活。分析四个， B选项“了解”最合适。
4. I’m going to show you around my hometown.
show sb around 意为“带领某人参观”
例：I don’t know who will show me around 我不知道谁将会带领我参观。
汉译英
带领来访者参观我们的城市是我的职责
______________________________________________
答案:It is my job to show the visitor around our city .
批注：本题考查句意理解和句子翻译。本句所用句型是It is one’s job to do sth ,所用重要短语是show sb around sp
成绩较好的学生还可以拓展一些有关于show的词组：
show off 卖弄, 炫耀 陈列; 使显眼 show oneself 出现, 露面
show up 到席, 露面; 显眼; 暴露; 揭发; 嘲笑; 使人难堪
5. People here know each other.
each other意为“互相”。常用短语有help each other“互相帮助”；know each other“互相了解”；learn from each other“互相学习”；talk with each other “互相交谈”等。
例 Li Lei and Wang Hong know each other.
汉译英
我们应该互相学习互相帮助
______________________________________________
答案:We should learn from each other and help each other.
在A、B、C、D四个选项中，选出可以填入空白处的正确选项： （20分）
( ) 1.How many bags of food can we buy with the money ?.
A. No one B. EverythingC. Nobody D. None
( ) 2.I enjoy watching football matches on TV..
A. Me too B. You are welcome C. Why not? D. That’s all right
( ) 3.How much money do you have?
A. No one B. Nothing C. Only one yuan D. Not any
( ) 4.--______________________？
--We can buy a pizza with it.
A. How much money do you have B. What can we buy with the money?
C. How many kilos of food can we buy D. What shall we do next
( ) 5.This is ____ quiet girl and ______ girl is famous for singing..
A. a; theB. the ; a C. a ;a D. the; the
( ) 6.why ______ our local theatre with us tonight?
A. visit B. you visit C. not visit D. you don’t visit
( ) 7.A theatre is a nice place ______ if you like Beijing Opera.
A. go B. to go C. going D. to going
( ) 8. Miss Wang is teaching ________ English in the classroom.
A. they B .their C. them D. theirs
( ) 9.We have lots of things _______ on Sunday。
A. to buyB. buyC. buying D. to buying
( )10.We don’t have to go to too far if we need help ______our homework.
A. for B. withC. about D. without
答案: 1-5 DACBA 6-10 CBBAB
完成对话(10分)
A: Mike, _______1__________?
B: Eleven. There are eleven good friends coming to my party.
A: How much will they cost, do you know?
B: Thirty-three dollars.2.__________________
A: Oh, I see. Look! There is a red purse on the floor.3.____________
B: No, it is not mine. Mine is in my hand.
A: Whose it is, then?4.____________________
B: Let me see. I’m sorry I don’t know. Maybe it is hers.
A: 5.__________________
B: All right. Let’s go.
答案: 1. C 2. D 3. A 4. B 5. E
句子翻译。(10分)
1.怀特先生会把你带到邮局的。
_____________________________________________
2.我们愿意在我们学校的足球场踢足球。
_____________________________________________
3.爸爸每周六下午从上海给我打电话。
_____________________________________________
4.我带你到公园去见一见我的一位老朋友。
_____________________________________________
5.你在这整个地区都可以看到这种树。
_____________________________________
答案：1. Mr. White can take you to the post office.
2. We’d like to play football on our school’s football field.
3. My father calls me from Shanghai every Saturday afternoon.
4. I’ll take you to the park to see an old friend of mine.
5. You can see this kind of trees all over the place.
你认为本次课最难的知识点是哪一个？
三、完形填空：（20分）
What do you know about the sea? Everybody knows that the sea 1 beautiful when the sun is shining 2 it. But it becomes very terrible when there is a strong wind. If you study the map of the world, you’ll 3 that about three quarters of the world is the sea.
Have you ever been at sea? The sea is very deep. In some places the sea is much deeper. The 4 mountain in the world is about 9 kilometers high 5 the deepest place of the sea is 6 11 kilometers’ deep.
The sea can be very cold. At the top of the sea the water may be 7 . But if you go down it becomes colder and colder. In most places of the sea, there are lots of 8 and plants. Some live near the top of the sea. Others live deep down.
You know the sea water is salty. The water of the Dead sea is very salty. It’s so salty that fish 9 live in it. 10 a strange sea!
1.A.looks B. sees C. watchesD. looks at
2.A.inB. on C. into D.to
3.A.guess B .learn C. know of D. feel
4.A.high B. tall C. higherD. highest
5.A.but B. becauseC. while D. highest
6.A.near B. almost C. nearby D. near by
7.A.cold B. warm C. things D. colder
8.A.fishes B. beasts C. things D. colder
9.A.don’t B. can’tC. wouldn’t D. may not
10.A.How B. How is C. WhatD. What is
Key: 1.A 2.B 3.B 4.D 5.C 6.B 7.B 8.A 9.B 10.C
阅读理解(20分)
The Farmer, His Horse, and His son
Once there was an old farmer, with a horse which was almost as old as himself. He set out one morning with his son to sell the horse before it died. Father and son walked, because the farmer did not want the horse to be too tired. They met two men on the road who said, ”Why are you walking, farmer? You have a horse, It's a long way to market(市场). “The farmer know that this was true, so he rode on the horse, while his son walked. Then they met two old women, ”What are you doing up there, farmer? Can't you see how tired boy is?“ So the farmer got down, and his son rode instead. Next, three old men stopped them, one said, ”Why are you walking, farmer? Get up, It's too hot for an old man like you to walk today,“ So the farmer got up behind his son, and they rode on. Some time later, a young woman passed them, ”Why aren't you walking?“ she asked, ”It isn't far to the market. Give your poor horse a rest.“ So the farmer, and his son, got down once again. It is a fact that you cannot please all the people all the time.
1. The farmer wanted to sell the horse ____.
A. before it was dead B. before it become too tired
C. before it market was over D. before it was as old as he was
2. The two men on the road ____.
A. asked how far it was to the market
B. said they thought the horse looked very tired
C. asked why the farmer was not riding on his horse
D. told the farmer's son to get off the horse and walk
3. The two old women said it was wrong for ____.
A. the farmer to ride such a tired horse
B. the farmer to ride while his young son walked
C. the boy to ride instead of his father
D. only one person to ride such a long way
4. The farmer got up behind his son because ____.
A. the old man said it was too hot for him to walk
B. the three old men stopped them on the road
C. he did not know why he was walking
D. his son could not ride the horse by himself
答案： A C D A
篇6：unit 1 this is meTeaching Plan(译林牛津版七年级英语教案教学设计)
Main Task Writing about yourself
ⅠTeaching content
a. Let the Ss know something more about Millie and Daniel
b. Introduce oneself to others
Ⅱ Aims and Demands
The Ss are required to :
1. Learn the following key words and expressions
Lots of (=a lot of) at the weekend
Look for on the Internet
Talk on the phone want to be
Grow up dark phone
2. organize ideas before writing
3. write about oneself for an audience
Ⅲ.Teaching Aids:
A computer, projector and a recorder
Ⅳ. Procedure
1. Pre-reading
Before the class, ask the Ss to prepare a short speech about the Ss at Beijing Sunshine secondary school. Such as: Kitty, Millie, Simon, Amy, David
Main ideas: appearance hobbies
2. T: At the end of the lesson yesterday, I asked you to prepare a short speech about the Ss at Beijing Sunshine secondary school. Remember that? If not, never mind. Let’s first look at the screen and review sth. about them….
3. Divide the class into six groups.
Let the Ss have group discussions
Ss report
4. T: Do you want to know more about Millie and Daniel?
Ss: Yeah.
Ask the Ss to look at the picture and the table , then ask and answer some questions.
Name Millie
Age 12
Birthday 3rd October
appearance 1.35 metres tall
dark brown eyes
black hair
hobbies Listen to music
Reading and writing
Talking on the phone
1) How old is Millie?
2) When is her birthday?
3) Where was she born?
4) Where does she live now?
5) Where is Andy?
6) What’s her appearance?
7) What’s her hobbies?
5. books open and read Millie’s profile.
Let the Ss read the whole profile and retell Millie’s profile in groups.
Group work. Then ask two or three students from different groups to say sth. about Millie.
6. We have known Millie a lot now! what about Daniel?
Let the Ss read Daniel’s profile and try to ask questions in groups.
Group work.
7. A competition
See which group can ask the most questions? If the Ss want to ask questions, put up their hands as quickly as possible.
8. Consolidation
After the competition , ask the Ss fill in the blanks with the right words.
I’m Daniel. I’m ______ years old. My ___________ is on 7th ________. I was born in Nanjing. I live with my family in _________ .I am not very ________ . I have _______ hair and I wear ________ . I really ________ school.. I like all my lessons. I am nit very good at __________ . I love playing _________ _________ and looking ___________ things on the Internet. I want to _________ a computer _____________ when I ________ up.
9. Lear some key words and expressions
Look for :hope for sth. or expect sth.
Grow up : become adult
Lots of (=a lot of): a large number of
Etc.
10. T: What do we learn from Millie and Daniel’s profiles ? Do you know how to write a profile of oneself? Ss discuss first.
Answers: 1. introductoion
2. appearance
3. hobbies
4. future
11. Tell the class about yourself.
Write your own profile on P15.
Show two or three profiles on the projector. Correct them with the class .
12. Homework
1. To recite the profile s on P15
2. Finish off all the exercises in the Wb.
篇7：江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案7B Unit5 Abilities(译林牛津版七年级英语下册教案教学设计)
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人：陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit5 Abilities 总课时 10 第 1 课时
课 题 comic and welcome to the unit 课型 New
教学目标 知识目标 1. To learn some new words such as: ability , Super dog , fly , careful , collect elderly
2. To revise vocabulary about helping people in the community.
3. To generate ideas about ways to care for and help others
能力目标 To generate ideas about ways to care for and help others.
情感目标 To educate the students to be polite and helpful to others.
教学重点 How to stimulate the students how to care about others and help.
教学难点 Talking about what people can do.
课前预习1.Preview the new words.
2.Listen to the tape and read the dialogue.
教学方法 情景交际法、任务型教学法
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step1. Greetings ＆Warming up
.
Step 2 Presentation
Step 3 Comic strip
Step 4 Learning “Helping Hands Club”.
Step 5 Make a survey
Step Five: Consolidation---an investigation
Step6:Assignment:
1.Play a game called: I can …
Talk to students about Superman. Guide students to understand the meanings of “can” and “can’t”.
Watch a video about “Superman”.
Talk about the things what Superman can do in groups and report .
Talk about dogs can do and can’t do.
First get some information from the pictures and then ask questions:
1.What does Eddie want to do?
2.Can dogs fly?
3.What happened to Eddie?
4. What do you think of Eddie?
Listen to the tape and guess the meaning of “Superdog, hurt, be careful
Ask students to think about the consequences of their daily actions Guide students to understand what they can do and can’t do.
Read and act.
Free talk: How to be a helpful person?
Present pictures about Daniel and his friends.
Ask questions about the pictures:
1.What is Daniel doing ?Do you often help the old or the blind cross the road?
2.What is Sandy doing? Why should we plant more trees?
3.Where are Daniel and the woman with a baby? What is happening? Have you ever given seats to others?
4.Which place is it? What are the children doing now? Have you ever done something good like this?
5.What are the students doing from the pictures? How much did you donate to the Project Hope this term? Is it better to give than to receive? Why?
6. Where are Daniel and his friends? What are they doing? Do you often leave rubbish everywhere? Is it our duty to protect our environment?
Read and understand the sentences.
Fill in the table about what you have done in your daily life at school to see if you are a polite and helpful boy/girl? If not ,What should you do next?
1.Can you Say hello to teachers when you meet them?
2.Can you clean the classroom carefully when you are on duty?
3.Can you pick up the rubbish in the classroom or around the campus?
4.Can you help your classmate with their homework?
5.Can you help stand in line at dinner time?
6.Can you give the thing back to the person who lost it?
7.Can you do something good to your teachers?
8.Can you look after the things in our classroom?
9.Can you take care of your classmate who is ill?
10.Can you keep our classroom clean and tidy?
To see how many are good enough and how many should improve their behavior.
Group work: What can /can’ you do in public? then ask the group leader to have a report.
1.Recite the dialogue and remember the sentences on Page 73.
2.Writing: “How to be a helpful person ? Ss listen and ask and answer.
Ss listen and try to answer.
Play the tape and ask Ss to repeat
Ss have a discussion
Ss do it by themselves.
Ss practise the dialogue.
板书设计 7A Unit5 Comic strip& welcome
ability , Superdog , fly ,
careful , collect elderly
教学反思
江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人：陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit5 Abilities 总课时 10 第 2 课时
课 题 Reading I 课型 New
教学目标 知识目标 1.To introduce and expand vocabulary to describe dangerous situations.
2.To guess context from the text type, the title and the picture.
能力目标 4.To identify the name of specific places and actions.
情感目标 To know what to do in danger.
教学重点 Award for Bravery
教学难点 Use “can” or “can’t” to talk about abilities
课前预习1Preview the new words.
2Listen to the tape and read the text
教学方法 情景教学法、归纳法
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step 1.Revision
Step2 Reading
Step3 Practice
Step 4 Homework
Revise what the children learned in the last period.
1.be careful
2.Helping Hands Club
3.give seat to someone on the bus
4. collect things for Project Hope
5.Clean up the park/playground
6.visit a home for the elderly
7. plant trees
8.a superdog
1. warming up:
Talk about danger and potential danger at home. Ask if any students have ever had an accident at home. Talk about what to do in case of danger.
2.Watch a set of pictures about a fire to present the new words:
neighbor, smoke, fire, rush, dangerous, burn, hurt, pour, rush, save, blanket, put out the fire
3.Read the story and try to get some information. Then say T or F according to the text.
1). Zhang Hua helped his classmate out of a fire.
2). Wei Hua’s neighbour is 79 years old.
3). Mrs Sun couldn’t get out because he hurt his arm.
4). Zhang Hua was afraid when he saw a lot of smoke.
5). Zhang Hua put out the fire with a blanket and helped Mrs Sun out.
6). The fire burned Zhang Hua’s neck and leg.
7). Zhang Hua was in hospital for two months.
8). Zhang Hua said he was glad to help others and fire was not dangerous.
Listen and read after the text and ask questions.
1). How old is the brave boy?
2). When did he help his neighbour out of a fire?
3). How old is Mrs Sun?
4). Where was Mrs Sun when there was a fire?
5). Why couldn’t Mrs Sun get out of his house?
6). How did Zhang Hua put out the fire?
7). Did Zhang Hua hurt himself?
8). How long was Zhang Hua in hospital?
5. Discuss any problems about the text.
6. Game :
Write the definitions fromPartB1 on the cards. Mix up the cards and let each group guess the word and read out the word. One who gets the most cards is the winner.
7. Have an interview.
First fill in the blanks and read the conversation. Then have an interview in groups. One is Zhang Hua, the others are the reporters.
8. Discuss in groups. What does the writer think of Zhang Hua? What do you think about him? Why do you think so? What do you do when you meet the accident like this?
Step3Assignment
1. Recite the new words and read the text.
2. Finish the exercises in the workbook.
3. Prepare the interview for the brave b.
Ss answer the questions
Ss listen and try to answer
Ss do it by themselves.
通过问题引导学生思考故事的种类，为进入下一环节打下伏笔
板书设计 Unit 4 Reading 1
love story 1.What did Millie and Amy hear in the park when they sat under the tree?
funny story 2.What made the noise?
exciting story 3.At last, who found the ghost? And in fact, what was it?
ghost story
教学反思
江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人：陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit5 Abilities 总课时 10 第 3 课时
课 题 ReadingⅡ 课型 New
教学目标 知识目标 1. Further understanding the text.
2. Introduce the use of the prefix un- and suffix –less to form opposites.
能力目标 2. Learn more about fire safety.
情感目标 To use different suitable adjectives to describe people’s behavior and character.
教学重点 the use of the prefix un- and suffix –less to form opposites
教学难点 prefix un- and suffix –less
课前预习1.Listen to the tape and read the text
2.To summarize key points of a story by sequencing statements
教学方法 讲授法 练习法
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step 1 Revision
Step Two: Presentation:
Step3 An interview
Visit Zhang Hua in hospital
Step4.Fire safety
Step5.Homework： Review the text through the questions:
Revise the vocabulary in the text by giving the definitions.
Ask students to read the text after the tape again.
Let students ask and answer questions about the story.
Revise the key words phrases and sentences .
1.help sb out of a fire help with /(to)do sth.
2.alone/lonely eg:I often stay home alone on Sundays but I don’t feel lonely.
3. hear sb do /doing sth; see do/ doing
I often hear the girl next door play the piano in the morning.
Last night when I was doing my homework, suddenly I heard someone shouting ”help! Help!”.
4 a 79-year-old Mrs Sun ,an 8-day holiday two-hour homework
5.hurt The boy fell off the bicycle and hurt his leg. hurt by fire
6.pour… over
7.put out the fire put on/ up/down/ into/away
8. be in hospital/be in the hospital Grandpa is ill badly today. Now he is hospital. His fater works in the hospital.
9.It is important to be careful with fire. Be care with sth Children must be careful with matches.
10.keep one’s life from danger keep … from I should keep my father from smoking.
11.Thank you for joining us this evening.
First read the task to understand it.
Read the dialogue to find out and correct the mistakes.
Read the conversation in pairs.
Act it out.
Do it in groups. In each group one student can be Zhang Hua, the others can be reporters to interview her. Then choose some groups to perform .
Read the sentences and match the right pictures.
Read out the sentences.
Notes: leave …on , keep away from
Ask students to think of other ways about fire safety. Eg: Don’t run on the stairs. Don’t play on the road. Don’t lean out the window.
1.Revise what we learned from P78 and remember the new words.
2. Do some exercises.
Answer the questions
板书设计 Unit5 Reading 2
1. help sb out of a fire help with /(to)do sth.
2. alone/lonely eg:I often stay home alone on Sundays but I don’t feel lonely.
3. hear sb do /doing sth; see do/ doing
4 a 79-year-old Mrs Sun an 8-day holiday two-hour homework
5.hurt The boy fell off the bicycle and hurt his leg. hurt by fire
6.pour… over
7. put out the fire put on/ up/down/ into/away
教学反思
江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人:陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit5 Abilities 总课时 10 第 4 课时
课 题 Vocabulary 课型 New
教学目标 知识目标 To develop an understanding of the use of adj. in different contests
能力目标 To use suitable adj. to describe people’s behavior and character
情感目标 To describe a good friend.
教学重点 To present factual information in writing
教学难点 To present an article about an animal
课前预习1.Preview the new words.
2.Listen to the tape and read after the tape
教学方法 情景教学法、归纳法
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
step 1 greetings
Step2.Presentation.
Step3. Practice
Step 4.Homework
Make sure that students understand the concept of opposite
Give some similar examples. e.g. hot /cold , fast / slow ,
big / small
3.Explain the concept of prefixes and suffixes .Tell students that when we add the prefix un-in front of some adjectives, it usually means ‘ not’. Give some examples
eg. friendly / unfriendly , healthy / unhealthy, lucky /unlucky ,usual /unusual .
When w e add the suffix –ful to the end of some adjectives , it means ‘ full of ……’ i.e. the person or Teaching procedures:
3.Ask students to look at the words in the left column of Part A and do the task on their own
4. Have one student read out a word from the left.
5.Explain the context of Part B .You may want to remind students about prizes that can be won at your school and activate students’ knowledge about recommendation letters .
Ask students to read two reports on their own first.
Ask them to try to make sense of what is being said in the reports.
Then students read the first report again
and use the mixed-up letters to help them make a suitable adjective .
Follow the same procedure for the second report. Ask students to read out the report one sentence at a time. Write the missing words on the board.
Ask students to write a report about
one of the classmates using one of
the reports in part B on page 77as a
model. Encourage them to use as
many adjectives as possible.
.
完成同步导学第4课时
Ss listen and take notes.
.
Ss read
and answer
do the exercises
板书设计 7B unit 5 Vocabulary
helpful slow
brave ungrateful
kind rude
careful afraid
polite unhelpful
grateful unkind
quick careless
happy unhappy
教学反思
江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人：陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit5 Abilities 总课时 10 第5课时
课 题 Grammar A 课型 New
教学目标 知识目标 To recognize and understand how to use: can and could to express
Ability in the present and past
能力目标 Ability in the present and past
情感目标 To recognize and understand how to use “can” and “could” to express ability in the present and past.
教学重点 How to recognize and understand the use of “can and could”
教学难点 the use of “can and could”
课前预习Preview the new words.
Look up the words in the dictionary to find out the differences
教学方法 情景教学法、归纳法
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step 1. Revision
Step 2.Warm-up
Step3:. Presentation:
Step4.:Practise
Step5.
Consolidation
Step 6: Homework Revise the last lesson.
Ask the student on duty to give a free talk.
1．Revise the key vocabulary about leisure activities and introduce “row a boat/ride a bike /fly a kite “Talk to students about summer camps in general and the type of activities offered /. Elicit as much real information from students as possible .
2．Students have already learned the use
of “can” and “may” in making requests
(Book7A unit2) therefore ,you need to introduce the idea that here,
the word “can” is used to express ability
1.Ask students to identify activities that
they can do well .Write students’
statements on the board .First write “I
can “on the board
2.Ask students to say the things they
can do ,and sort them into categories :
sports/leisure/school subjects
3. Go through the tables at the top of page 78 and explain the use of “can/could” and their negative forms. We use “can” to say that we are able to do something .We use “could” to say that we were able to do something in the past .
4. Ask students to work out the rule on
their own .Then they check with a
partner and confirm that their answer is
correct with the whole class .
5. Ask students to check the information
table in Part1 about the Beijing Sunshine Secondary School students’ abilities.
1.Reinforce the use of “could/ could not” for the past and “can/can not” for the
present .Then they complete the sentences
on their own .
2. Students do Part A2 first on their own and hen check their completed sentences with a partner ,Then ask students to read the conversation in pairs .
3. Check answers as a class, remind them to write the pattern into their grammar pattern books together with their
own examples.
完成<<1+1>>相关内容。 Revision
Free talk
Talk about what they can do
Go through the new words
Learn and practice
板书设计 7B Unit5 Grammar A
can can’t could couldn’t
She couldn’t swim last year.
She can swim now.
I could swim across the river when I was young
But I can’t do it now.
教学反思
江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人：陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit5 Abilities 总课时 10 第 6 课时
课 题 Grammar B and C 课型 New
教学目标 知识目标 1. To recognize and understand how to use “can ”and “could”
2. To recognize and understand how to use can and could to talk about Possibility in the present and past.
3. To recognize and understand how to use “how” and “what”.
能力目标 Use “can” and “could” to talk about possibility.
情感目标 To educate the students to help each other.
教学重点 To recognize and understand how to use “can” and “could” to talk about Possibility in the present and past.
教学难点 Talking about possibility .The differences between “may” and “might”.
课前预习1.Preview the new words.
2.Listen to the tape and read the dialogue.
教学方法 情景交际法、任务型教学法
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step 1. Guessing a riddle.
Step 2. Revision.
Step3.Presentation.
Step 4. Practice:
Step 5 Step 5. Presentation.
Step 6.Practice.
Step 7. Homework
It can live in water. It can breathe under water. It can swim. It can live in a glass bowl. People can feed and watch them every day. What is it?
(A goldfish)
Make different kinds of sentences with “can” and “could”.
1)read English story books.(last year)
2)mend computers.(two years ago)
3)help Mother do housework.(at the age of seven)
1.Say:
①Zhang Hua works hard. It is possible for him to pass the exam.
(He can pass the exam)
②Nick didn’t bring a football to school.
It is not possible for us to play football after class.
(We can’t play football after class.)
③It was sunny last Sunday. It was possible for the children to go to the park.(The children could go to the park)
④Millie had no money yesterday. It was not possible for her to buy that coat.
(She couldn’t buy that coat.)
2.Show the sentences above on the screen and explain them to the students:
We use “can” / “could” to say that something is / was possible to happen.
3. Get the students to explain with “possible”.
①Fire can be dangerous if we are not careful.
②Mr. Sun can’t beat home because I saw him at school just now.
③I didn’t lose my key so I could get in.
④Mr. Sun could not get out because he hurt his leg.
1.Fill in the blanks.
2. Work in pairs to talk about something that can / could / can’t / couldn’t happen.
3. Report to the class.
4. Explain:
If we think something is sure to happen, We’d better use “must”.
eg.I saw Mr Yang in the library a moment ago. He must(一定) be in the school now.(Get the students to give more examples)
How cool!
How cool Eddie is!
What a cool dog!
What a cool dog Eddie is
Fill in the blanks with: How/What
( ) beautiful the flowers are!
( ) a brave young man!
( ) fast he runs!
good students they are!
“Grammar” in <<1+1>>.
Preview new words.
Ss listen and guess.
Ss listen and try to answer.
Ss do it by themselves.
Ss practise the dialogue.
Ss do the exercises by themselves.
板书设计 7A Unit5 grammar B& C
can Fire can be very dangerous.
could Anything could happen to her at that moment.
How cool!
What a brave young man!
How cool the young man is!
教学反思
江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人：陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit5 Abilities 总课时 10 第 7 课时
课 题 Integrated skills 课型 New
教学目标 知识目标 1.To identify and note specific details and guess meaning from text .
2.To identify specific information presented in written and spoken form and make notes
能力目标 To develop the students’ abilities of listening ,speaking,reading and writing.
情感目标 To know how to describe someone.
教学重点 Language focus: do one’s best, be weak at, haveget good gradesesults in, no problem.
教学难点 Use “can” or “can’t” to talk about abilities and possibility.
课前预习1Preview the new words.
2Listen to the tape and read the text
教学方法 情景教学法、归纳法
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step 1.Warming up:
Step2 Speak up
Step3 Practice
Step4Homework
1 Revise the key vocabulary about leisure activities and introduce “row a boat/ride a bike/fly a kite” and “ Talk to students about summer camps in general and the type of activities offered n/. Elicit as much real information from students as possible.
2. Students have already learned the use of “can” and“may”in making requests(Book7A , unit2) therefore , you need to introduce the idea that here, the word “can” is used to express ability .
3.Ask students to identify activities that they can do well .Write students’ statements on the board. First write “I can “on the board.
4.Ask students to say the things they can do , and sort them into categories : sports/ leisure/school subjects
5.Go through the tables at the top of page 78 and explain the use of “can/could” and their negative forms.We use “can” to say that we are able to do something.We use “could” to say that we were able to do something in the past .
1. Talk to students about situations when they might talk about their own abilities, then read the conversation to the class. Present the conversation line by line, focusing on intonation and linking of words. Ask students to repeat untill they do not sound mechanical.
2.Ask students to replace the underlined words with their own infornation. Emphasize that use the sentences automatically and fluently outside the classmates.
3. Ask some more able pairs to present their own conversation to the class. Encourage other students to comment on whether they could understand each conversation clearly.
Do some exercises
1.通读全文，找出文中重点短语。
2.完成《同步1+1》上相关练习。
Ss listen and ask answer.
Ss listen and try to answer.
板书设计 Unit 5 Integrated skills
row a boat ride a bike
fly a kite can could
教学反思
江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人：陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit5 Abilities 总课时 10 第 8 课时
课 题 Study Skills 课型 New
教学目标 知识目标 To develop students’ awareness about what they are learning
能力目标 To develop the ability to work independently of the teacher
情感目标 To develop a systematic recording system of progress.
教学重点 To develop the ability to work independently of the teacher
教学难点 To develop a systematic recording system of progress.
课前预习1. read the text first.
2 .learn the new words.
教学方法 讲授法 练习法
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step 1 Revision
Step2 Presentation:
Step 3
practice
Step 4:
Tell students that they are now able to talk about their present and past abilities using “can/ could”.Introduce the idea that we also use“can/could” to express possibilities .
1.Ask students to study the tables at the top of the page to clarify the use of “can/could” and their negative forms.
2.Explain to students the concept of possibility.We use “can” to say that something is possible . We use “could” to something was possible. However, we are not talking about thechances that something will happen.Provide examples using students’ own experience :School finishes at 4 p.m. The bus leaves at 4:10p.m. we can take the bus home .It will be warm tomorrow so we can wear short sleeves .
1.Ask them to do PartB1 in pairs , For less able students ,allow them refer to the table on the top of page 80 .
2. Check the answer as a class. Pay special attention to any common mistakes and clarify them. choose five students to read aloud .
1.Do the exercises after class.
2.Prepare the text.
Talk freely
Ss listen carefully.
Ss do the exercises by them selves.
板书设计 Unit5 study skills
date What I learnt Can I do it comments
教学反思
江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人:陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit5 Abilities 总课时 10 第 9 课时
课 题 Main task 课型 New
教学目标 知识目标 To adapt language to write descriptions for a specific purpose and audience
能力目标 To practice writing formal letters
情感目标 To use persuasive language
To discuss suitable date and time for a farewell party.
教学重点 To adapt language for a specific purpose and audience
教学难点 To practice writing formal letters
To use persuasive language
课前预习1.Preview the new words.
2.Listen to the tape and read after the tape
教学方法 情景教学法、归纳法
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step 1.
Revision
Step2.
Warming-up
Step3. presentation
Step 4. Sum-up
Step5:Practice
Step6. Homework
Revise some phrases the students learned last lesson.
1.Introduce the idea that we also use “may” and “might” to express possibilities . Students probably know how to use “may” for making polite requests but possibly will not know the meaning of “might”.Tell them that “might” is the past tense form of “may” .
However , we also use “might” to talk about possibility. Explain the context by talking to students about the Class 1 Grade 7students’ summer Camp and what the students may / may not or might / might not de there .Talk students through some examples using questions about everyday events at your school .
1.Ask students to study the tables at the top of the page, and explain to them the difference between the uses of “may” and “might”.
2.Have more able students provide other sentences to illustrate “may” and “might” .Encourage them to think of their own examples to express degrees of possibilities .
3.Explain the context of Part C . Ask students to read what each person is saying and underline the keywords in each speech bubble. ”maybe” , “only a small chance”, “I’m sure” and “highly possible”. These words will determine the use of specific modal verbs .
Then ask students to complete sentences 1-4 at the bottom of the page . Check the answer as a class activity . Clarify any possible problems
Finish<<1+1>>
Ss listen, ask and answer.
Have a discussion.
Ss listen and answer.
板书设计 7B unit 5 Main task
Date name of sender subject title of sender
address of sender signature of sender closing date
address of receiver
教学反思
江苏省淮北中学英语学科教案
初一年级教案活页纸 主备人：陈小军 审核人：初一英语组全体老师
总 课 题 7B Unit5 Abilities 总课时 10 第10课时
课 题 Check out 课型 New
教学目标 知识目标 1.To adapt language for a specific purpose and audience
能力目标 2. To practice writing formal letters
情感目标 .To use persuasive language
教学重点 How to recognize and understand the use of “can and could”“how and what”
教学难点 the use of “can and could” “how and what”
课前预习Preview the new words.
Look up the words in the dictionary to find out the differences
教学方法 情景教学法、归纳法
教学过程
教学环节 教 师 活 动 学 生 活 动 备课札记
Step1. Revision
Step 2.Warm-up
Step3:
Presentation:
Step 4. Sum-up
Step4.:Practise
Step6: Homework
Revision
Remind students of the newspaper article in the reading section about a brave young person .Ensure that students are interested in the topic before dealing with the technical aspects of writing a letter .
Help students brainstorm as many ideas as possible for choosing a person they wish to write about .
Ensure that Ss understand the instructions.
Ask the Ss to look at the picture and write the correct words to describe each picture.
yours faithfully
send the postcard to my parents.
1.Go through the new words and the language points learnt during this lesson.
2.Ask them to do PartB1 in pairs , For less
able students , allow them refer to the
table on the top of page 80 .
3. Check the answer as a class .Pay special
attention to any common mistakes and clarify them choose five students to read aloud .
1. Review the contents of this lesson.
2. Do the Exx of the workbook.
Revision
Free talk
Fill in the blanks
write in their answers
Look at the picture and write the correct words
板书设计 7BUnit5 Check out
can can’t could couldn’t
She couldn’t swim last year.
She can swim now.
教学反思
（小周）
篇8：牛津7AUnit6(译林牛津版七年级英语上册教案教学设计)
Teaching content：Comic strip and welcome to the unit
Teaching aims：1.复习掌握已学过的衣服的名称。
2.复习掌握已学过的颜色单词。
3.掌握并会使用服装的制作材料。
4.掌握并灵活运用课文中的对话。
5.教育学生养成乐于助人的品质。
Teaching focus ：1.衣服的名称及其制作材料。
2.会描述人物的穿着打扮。
Teaching aids：教学挂图，多媒体。
Teaching procedure：
Warming up:
Let the students see some pictures of the fashion show on the screen.
Pre - task:
1. Use the pictures to review the names of the clothes.
2. Review the colours. Ask the Ss to say the colours of the clothes.
3. Describe yourself what you are wearing today. Then ask some students to describe what they are wearing.
While- task:
1. Eddie is going to a fashion show. Will you please help him to dress up?
2. See some pictures of different kinds of dogs in clothes on the screen.
3. Use the pictures on the screen to present some new words: the material of the clothes. (silk, cotton, leather, wool,)
eg. Look at this lovely dog. Its scarf is white, and its made of silk.
4.Practise
Now Eddie is on the fashion show. He looks smart. He is doing a good job. He raises a lot of money for Project Hope. Use the following words to describe what Eddie is wearing.
names shoes hat scarf coat
colours black red white Yellow
materials leather wool silk cotton
5．Learn ”comic strip“.
A. Present the comic strip. Help the Ss understand the meaning.
eg. Eddie is going to a fashion show. But he doesn't know what to wear. So he asks Hobo. Hobo tells him not to wear any clothes because dogs don't wear clothes.
B. Repeat the dialogue
C. Read the dialogue after the teacher.
D. Ask some students to act it out.
Post- task:
1.Welcome to the unit
A. Looking good and raising money.
The students are giving a fashion show to raise money for Project Hope. Look at the two students below and put the following words in the correct boxes.
B. Clothes and materials
Millie wants to join the fashion show. She wants to know the names of the names of the different materials. Help her write the correct words under the pictures.
2. Give a fashion show
Ask several students to give a fashion show.
The Second Teaching Plan Of Unit 6
Teaching Aims: (1) 认知目标：学习本课阅读内容。To learn the main diea of the reading.
(2) 技能目标：通过学生的活动，口头表达某人的衣着。初步完成本单元任务活动。
（3）情感目标：师生双边活动，增强亲合力，共同感受时装魅力。
Teaching contents: To learn the reading part of this unit, to grasp the main idea of this unit
Teaching Language Points: raise money; Project Hope, in /from 1980s;look colorful, / smart/modern /cool; a pair of blue jeans, fashion show.
Teaching procedures:
1. Lead-in (1)Select some Ss, Say something about their clothes. Pay attention to size, colour, and ues some suitable adjective words. Such as : smart, modern, cool, …
eg: 1. What colour is his coat?
2. What size is it ?
3. Does he look cool? …
(2) Ask the some Ss to describe my clothes. (to express one’s fashion with the words appeared in the reading. )
2. Warming up exercises: Present the new materials by picture.
(1) To distinguish the fashions in different times.(through pictures prepared.)
(2) Sum up. To describe a person in a short passage. (according to the pictures.)
Just like: “Deniel looked smart and modern. He wore blue and yellow sports clothes. He also wore a pair of colourful trainers. ”
3. Present the new materials; (1) Listening to the tape recorder and try to finish the form below.
Simon Clothes(1980s) Looked colourful Trousers were _____.His shirt was __ ____His tie was _______
Daniel ------ Looked ____ & ____. He wore ________.He also ______ trainers
Millie Give a talk on “_______” Young people ______ in 1990s. The trainers are _______.
Amy Young people like to wear ___________ Looked cool . She wore a yellow ‘silk blouse with ______ and a pair of blue jeans _____.
Sandy (I) Clothes(1990s) I wore ___, ____ and ______. I also wore my hair _____.
(2)Ask the Ss to sum up the impression on each student.(axxording to the form above)
(3) Try to retell the main ideas of the story.
4.Ask Ss to draw some pictures about Simon, Daniel, Millie, Amy and I.
This course is for the purpose of main task
5.Ss’ activities. Say something about the pictures drawn on the Bb.
6. Listen and read after the tape. (Pay attention to the intonation and pronunciation.) and try to translate some important sentences into Chinese.
7. Homework for today. Draw a picture of oneself in fashion for the Fashion Wall.
The Third Period of Unit 6
Teaching Contents: Reading A B
Teaching Topic: The Fashion Show
Teaching Aims: 1、进一步理解课文的主题
2、学习有关服装的名称、面料、色彩的运用
3、能够描述某个人的着装特色，增强个人的审美意识
Teaching LanguagePoints: 用新闻报道的形式写关于时装秀的一篇短文
Ⅰ.Greeting
Ⅱ.Warming up
1. Read the names of clothes with the picture on P87 (A)
T : He / She looks beautiful ( smart modern cool)
What is it?
S: Jacket tie shirt / blouse skirt
T : What are they?
S: Shoes trousers / boots
2. Ask the students about his (her) real life.
T: What are you wearing ?
S: A shirt.
T: What’s it made of?
S: It’s made of silk (wool leather cotton).
T: What colour is it?
S: It’s red .(yellow black white blue green purple)
Ⅲ. Reading (1)
1. Read the new words.
T: Last Friday ,Sandy’s class gave a fashion show.
Can you read the new words.
a fashion show Project Hope style scarf
time times trainer trainers century
smart modern colorful comfortable cool
2. Read the text
3. Qs and As
T: (1) Who wore white shoes?
(2) What did Simon wear?
(3) Who wore a blouse?
(4) What did Amy wear?
(5) Who wore sport clothes?
(6) Who wore a black skirt?
(7) Was Amy’s blouse silk? Was Amy’s scarf wool?
4. Fill in the blanks.
Name Clothes
Simon
Daniel
Sandy
Amy
Ⅳ.Reading (2)
T: Now let’s look at P90 (B) “Style and fashion”
Finish Kitty’s notes.
1. Simon wore a pair of white_____________
2. Millie talked about sports shoes called _____________
3.Young people like to wear trainers because they are ____________
4.Sandy wore a red____________
5. Simon’s _________ was yellow and red.
6.Amy wore a yellow __________ blouse and a pair of blue jeans.
Ⅴ.Post-task activity
(1) T: Now , I’ll ask you to say something about your friend’s fashionable clothes. And let’s guess who he is / she is .
S: He /She is wearing ….
(2) T: OK. Please come to the front and say something about yourself.
S: I’m wearing…
Ⅵ. Reading (3)
The students read the text again.
Ⅶ. Homework.
T: Please write an article about your friend’s fashionable clothes.
( about the fashion show)
The Fourth Period Of Unit 6 Fashion
Topic: Reading C, D
Aims:
1. Identify clothes and learn the names appeared in the reading part.
2. Arouse students’ enthusiasm for contacting others by interviewing.
3. Developing the ability of useing
I. Greetings
T: Hello, everyboy. Nice to see you again .Oh, Student A, your shirt is very beautiful, who bought it for you?
A: My father did.
T: Oh, I see. Student B, you look colourful. I think you can give a fashion show.
B: Thank you.
T: Do you still remember the fashion show?
Ss: Yes, we do.
II. Fashionable Clothes (C1)
1.T: Ok, let’s look at the pictures. Please tell us what these are.
(Teacher show them the pictures on the blackboard, ask students to tell the names.)
Picture One
C: scarf
T: Yes, scarf, a blue silk scarf. Read after me, please.
(Students read after teacher. Repeat the steps to go over the left pictures. Shirt, a black shirt;
boot, a pair of long red boots; tie, a yelllow and red tie; trousers, a pair of white trousers; trainers, a pair of colourful trainers.)
T: Good. Who wore these colthes at the fashion show? Who can answer this question? Please read the passage ‘ The fashion show’’, then answer the question.
(Students read it quickly.)
T: Who wore the scarf? Student E , please.
E: Amy wore the blue silk scarf at the fashion show.
(Ask students do the rest questions, write the names on the lines.)
2. Ask students to do the exercises in pairs like this:
A: What is this?
B: It’s a …..
A: Who wore it/them at the fashion show?
B: ….. did.
III. Fashionable Clothes (C2 )
T: Let’s come to the next part. Kitty wants to check her notes before she writes the article. Help her read her notes below. Write a T if the sentence is true. Write an F if it is false. Go ahead.
(Students read and check. Ask them to give the answers. If the sentence is false, ask them why, then correct it. Students read the true sentences.)
IV. A television interview
1.T: Kitty interviewed Simon and Sandy after the fashion show. Here are six sentences said by them. Read the sentences, then listern to the tape, try to find out who said what then write the correct numbers in the blanks.
(After the students finish reading the sentences, play the tape for them to listen to then ask them to write the numbers.)
2.T: Kitty interviewed Simon and Sandy after the fashion show. Do you know how Kitty interviewed them? Next please work in pairs or groups to act out the interview. Please use the sentences given in our textbook.
(Student prepair and act out the interview.)
V. Homework.Suggest some of our classmates just came from a fashion show. Do you want to know something about the fashion show? Do you want to know something about him?
The Fifth Period of Unit 6
TeachingContents: Vocabulary
TeachingTopics: Fashion Clothes
Teaching Aims :①To recognize adjectives that describe clothing
②To use adjectives to express opininons about how things look
Ⅰ:Warming up
T:Good morning
S:Good morning
T:What are you wearing ?
S:A silk shirt
T:Very beautiful
S:Thank you
Ⅱ: Part (A)
1,Show the six pictures and let the students guess who they are
S: Picture 1:Sandy
2:Amy
3;sandy
4:simon
5:Daniel
6:Daniel
2,Ask stronger classes to describe what their classmates are wearing. They can also describe their favourite clothes they wear at weekends.
e.g..Amy is wearing a yellow silk blouse
Sandy is wearing a pair of long red boots
3,Read the new words
boots blouse skirt tie trainers T-shirt
Ⅲ:Part (B)
1: help students describe the appearance of clothes with a wider range of adjectives. Introduce the idea of opposites. Brainstorm some common words:
big-small
old-new
short-long
slim-fat
young-old
2 :Ask students to do Part B on their own . For weaker classes, you may need to pre-teach or check the meaning of some words.
3:Have students compare answers with a partner’s. You could ask S1 to say the numbered words, one at a time ,and S2to say the word with the opposite meaning.
Ⅳ:Do a game
students work in pairs to describe a boy’s(girl’s) appearance and clothes,guess who he (she) is.
Game: He is wearing a yellow blouse and his clothes is heavy.
Q: Who is he ?
Extension activity
Do a survey. Write the table below on the board. Divide the class into groups of four.Have students interview each other using these questions.
What is your favourite clothing item? What materal is it made from? What colour is it?
Name of classmate Favourite clothes Material Colour
1
2
3
4
Ask students to present their fingings. Write some model sentences on the board to help students talk about their findings.
`they all like…’
‘One student like …and two students like…’
Ⅴ.Homework
1:Read the text after class
2:Preview grammar
The 6th and 7th Period Grammar
A Simple past tense
Task-based Teaching Aims:
1. Cognitive Development
Make sure students can recognize the tense freely.
2. Proficiency Level
To develop their integrated skills through listening, reading, speaking and writing. They can use the tense to make up sentences and dialogues freely after learning. They can also recognize and use adverbs to order events.
3. Affective Learning
To develop their enjoyments of life and things around them, especially the success of learning, through interactive teaching and student-oriented teaching.
4. Cultural Understanding
Make them feel the cultural differences between Eastern and Western Countries.
Step 1 Revise the purpose and use of the simple past tense by using a timeline. Draw a timeline on the board to show how the simple past tense is expressed in English. Give students some common time expressions: yesterday, last night, a month ago, yesterday afternoon, last week, ten years ago and make sure they can use the simple past tense to talk about things in the past.
e.g. 1. Eddie met Millie 3 years ago.
2. Eddie was ill yesterday.
Step 2 Teach them how to form the simple past tense before practicing them.
We form the simple past tense by adding ‘-ed’ to regular verbs.
Most verbs + ed walk →consonant walked
Verbs ending in e + d live → lived
Verbs ending in a consonant + y - y + ied try → tried
Short verbs ending in double the
a vowel + a consonant consonant + ed stop → stopped
We form the simple past tense of irregular verbs differently. We do not add ‘ –ed’.
No change cost → cost
Change the vowel come → came
Change the consonant make → made
Change the vowel (s) and the consonant (s) buy → bought
Writing about the past
A1. Write about the simple past tense forms of the verbs below.
1. start → started 2. dress → dressed 3. play → played
4. help → helped 5. use → used 6. like → liked
7. look → looked 8. study → studied 9. plan → planned
Step 3 Talk to students about what you did last weekend and ask some questions as you go along, e.g. I had a really good weekend.
Did you have a good weekend?
I played tennis for two hours.
What did you do?
I watched a film on Saturday evening. It finished at 11 p.m.
What did you do last Saturday?
On Sunday, I took a bus from Wangfujing.
There were a lot of people.
What did you do on Sunday?
Step 4 Teach them how to use the simple past tense to make positive and negative sentences, ask and answer questions. Have them complete the conversation. Check answers and clarify any misunderstandings.
Mrs Wang: Did Millie ask Grandma about the dress on Monday?
Andy: No, she didn’t. She went to the Reading Club. Did she help you with the shopping on Tuesday?
Mrs Wang: Yes, she did. Did she play volleyball on Wednesday?
Andy: Yes, she did. But she cleaned her bedroom.
Mrs Wang: I know! Did she do her Maths project?
Andy: No, she didn’t. But she did some work for the fashion show.
Step 5 Teach them how to use the simple past tense to form positive and negative sentences, ask and answer questions with the verb ‘ to be’. Have them complete the conversation. Check answers and clarify any misunderstandings.
Millie: Were you at home on Saturday morning?
Sandy: Yes, I was.
Millie: Was your cousin at the football match?
Sandy: No, he wasn’t. He was at the shopping mall with Mum.
Millie: Were you and your parents at the cinema on Saturday evening?
Sandy: Yes, we were.
Millie: Were your grandparents at the fashion show on Friday?
Sandy: No, they weren’t.
Millie: Were we at school last Monday?
Sandy: No, we weren’t. Last Monday was a holiday.
B Sequencing events
Step 1 To recognize and use adverbs to order events. Tell them to pay attention to the simple past tense. We use these adverbs to show the order in which things happen. We put the adverbs at the beginning of a sentence as they connect the sentences. We often use them to clarify a process or a particular sequence of events.
( first, then, next, afterward, finally)
Step 2 Ask students to do a presentation about their own day using the adverbs they have learned. Encourage them to include more information. Help them choose a title. Remind them to use the simple past tense.
B1 Briefly review the adverbs, using the picturesfor support.
Ask students to write the letters in the boxes in Ppart B1 individually. Students check each other’s sequence of sentences. Monitor the class as you walk around.
B2 Set the context by reminding students about the fashion show described earlier in the unit before asking students to do B2. Link Simon’s experience to any other events your students may have been involved in. introduce the idea of woriting a picture story as a narrative using adverbs and the simple past tense to order events.
Step 3 Review key vocabualry and explain unfamiliar words: ‘ catwalk.’
Ask questions about each picture.
1) What did Simon do first?
2) What did Simon wear?
3) What did he do next?
4) Who did Simon talk to?
5) Where did he go afterwards?
Ask students to write sentences about Simon’s day using the simple past tense. Check the answers as a class activity.
The Eighth Period of Unit 6 Fashion (Part 7)
Integrated Skills
Task-based Teaching Aims:
(1) Cognitive Development:
Through reading and listening to “The life of a trainer” , the Ss can learn and use relevant expressions freely.
(2) Proficiency Level:
To develop the Ss’ integrated skills through listening ,speaking, reading and writing .
(3) Affective Learning:
To develop the Ss’ enjoyments of life and things around them , especially the success of learning , through interactive teaching and student-oriented teaching .
(4) Cultural Understanding :
Make the Ss feel the cultural differences between Eastern and Western Countries.
Procedures:
Step One : Present a trainer and teach the different parts of it . Then listen and do part A1.
T: Is it a trainer ?
S: …
T: Do you like wearing trainers?
S: …
T: Do you know what the names of these parts are ?
S: …
T: OK. We call it “shoelace / sole / stripe / tongue”.
Step Two : Present the procedures of making a trainer .Then guide the Ss through the new words and let them speak out in English .
T: Now , boys and girls , I know that most of you like wearing trainers. Do you know how to make one ?
S: …
T: OK. First let’s have a look on the screen . Then please tell me about it .
S: …
T: OK. I know it’s very difficult for you to say . But it doesn’t matter . Now please discuss in your groups and later we’ll share your ideas together .
S: …(Discuss in groups )
T: (After listening to the Ss’ description , the teacher describes the general contents in Part A2 . Then let the Ss say after me twice . Finally listen and put the sentences in the correct order .)
Step Three : Present Part Two of the story . Then let the Ss get the general idea of it and pay much attention to the verbs past tense forms .
T: Now , we know how to make a trainer . Do you want to know how the trainer is getting along ? OK . Let’s listen carefully and complete the sentences in Part A4.
S: …
T: (After listening for three times , ask a student to present her answer , then check it . Teach the students to read the verbs and complete Part A3.)
T: Then guide the Ss to sum up the pronunciation principles of verbs past tense forms by reading themselves , such as:
清后[t], 元浊[d], [t][d]之后读[id].
eg: /t/ /d/ /id/
danced played acted
helped lived needed
talked answered visited
shopped carried shouted
Step Four :Present a fashion show and practise the sentences “What is / are … made of ? It’s/ They’re made of …”.
T: (First make a conversation with a student as a model in Part B. Then let the Ss work in groups of three to talk about the materials of their own clothes . Five or six minutes later , let them act out in the front and give the best a warm applause .)
Step Five :Written work
T: Now , we’ve learned the different parts of a trainer and how to make one . And we also see a fashion show and have learned different materials for making clothes . And would you please design some clothes and make a poster to give information about the styles , colours and materials of the clothes ? You can do it like this :
My Fashion ShowIntroduction Clothes A person wearing the clothes Introduction
T:OK. That’s all for today’s class . Thank you .
The Ninth Period of Unit 6 Fashion
Main task
Objectives
1 To describe different materials and items of clothing.
2 To make a brochure about clothes and fashion.
3 To present a brochure to the class.
Background information
Students will have opportunities to describe clothes and accessories. This section focuses on a fashion brochure for girls, which makes it necessary to bring in magazine pictures of boys’ fashions for mixed classes.
Bring in authentic brochures to show students the style of this kind of writing. Talk to students about the purpose of writing a brochure. Elicit from students as much information as possible about
1 Who are the readers?
2 What do the readers want to know?
3 How do you make your brochure look interesting to the reader?
Teaching procedures
1 Before doing the task, ask students who the audience is and emphasize the context in the Student’s Book of creating a ‘Fashion Wall’.
2 Tell students to read keywords below . Students identify any words they don’t know. Check and clarify the meaning of those words with the class.
Adjectives Clothing items MaterialsChecked hat silkSleeveless skirt cottonPatterned shirt denimLoose blouse leatherSpotted sweatshirt polyester Striped jacket viscoseFlowered sweater furTight socks linenComfortable tie Long shoesUncomfortable beltShort bootsBright suitFashionable dressModern CasualPolo-neckFormal
3 Enable students to describe themselves or their classmates by using the keywords above.
4 Ask students to read the model article on page 102. And tell them to use the model article and complete the sentences with word from Part A on page 101.
5 Check the answers and encourage students to express their opinions about the model article.
6 Tell students to choose one fashion item and make them aware of what kind of things . Their readers might like to read about . And tell students to create their own words to write a rough draft using the given model.
7 Let students read, check and correct their partner’s drafts in pairs and give them suggestions about the improvements in the use of words, spelling and structures and provide help while monitoring .
8 Make students rewrite their articles on a separate sheet of paper and add illustrations, particularly pictures of popular fashion items. Ask them to stick their work on the noticeboard and encourage them to read each other’s poster.
Sample writing
Teenagers like clothes that are fashionable and look good. My brochure is about casual, comfortable style.
First, I designed a cotton T-shirt. It is bright red and has a V-neck. It goes well with a pair of jeans. The jeans have wide legs. There are lots of big pockets at the front and back. I also designed a cotton shirt with long sleeves and buttons in the front.
Then I designed a pair of trainers to go with the jeans and T-shirt. They are very comfortable and made of white leather. They do not have laces, so they are easy to put on. The jacket I designed is blue with white sleeves.
All the clothes are comfortable to wear at weekends.
篇9：牛津高一英语模块一unit 1 words(译林牛津版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
Words:
1. attend vt. 出席, 参加
1) 出席，参加 ，vt. 后跟的宾语一般是meeting, conference, lecture，school, ceremony, church (school, church前一般不加冠词)
如：Did you attend the meeting?
He will attend school till he is sixteen.
辨析：attend , join, join sb (in doing) sth. , join in, take part in
attend表示出席，参加（会议，讲座，婚礼，听报告等），去上学，法院等）
join表示成为某个团体的一员（如参军、入党等）
join sb. (in doing sth.)表示和某人一起做某事。
You are too young to join the army
I’ll join you in a few minutes
join in 表示参加某种活动
take part in 多指参加（讨论、辩论或群众性活动）
May I join in the game?
John takes part in many school activities.
2) 照料 （某人）爱护 （某人） vt&vi.
She has two nurses attending (on) her.
2. earn vt.赚, 挣得, 获得
earn + 名词
earned money by teaching
earn respect from school
She earned a reputation as a hard worker.
勤劳的工作使她享有声誉
He has earned a lot of money by working in the evenings.
他利用晚上工作，已经挣了好多钱。
earn+ 名词（人）+名词（物）
His achievements earned him great respect.
earn one’s living / make a (one’s) living 谋生
3. respect
n.尊敬, 敬重, 注意, 考虑, 尊重, 关系, 有关 (un)
have /show respect for …
to pay (have) respect to留心于…， 考虑…
Child should show respect for their teachers
We must have respect for/ pay respect to the needs of the general needs.我们必须考虑到一般读者的需要。
敬意，问候 (pl.)
pay one's respects.表示敬意
Give my respects to your wife.= Give my regards to your wife请代我向你太太问好。
in all respects无论从哪方面来看
in respect of关于；就…来说
vt. 尊敬；尊重
I respect his courage.我敬佩他的勇气。
I'll respect your wishes.我尊重你的愿望。
Usually people don't respect those who are too compliant.
”一般来说人们看不起那种唯命是从,唯唯诺诺的人。“
4. achieve vt.
完成；实现
The university has achieved all its goals this year.
这个大学今年已经实现了所有的奋斗目标。
达到；获得
He hopes to achieve all his aims soon.他希望尽快达到所有目标。
achievement n.成就；成绩；成功
5. average
n.平均,平均水平,平均数
The average of 4, 8, and 60 is 24.
adj.一般的, 通常的,平均的
What is the average rainfall for August in your country? 你们国家八月份的平均降雨量是多少?
The average age of the students is 16.
His study is average in our class.
on (the/ an) average 通常；按平均
We fail one student per year on average.我们平均每年有一个学生不及格。
6. for free--- without payment adv.免费地（=free of charge）
He got the ticket for free.他获得免费票
They put on the play free of charge.他们举行义演。
free adj.自由的, 大方的, 免费的, 免税的, 丰富的, 空闲的
freedom un.自由
give slaves their freedom= set slaves free
7. prepare vt&vi
prepare sth.
prepare a meal 准备饭菜 have everything prepared beforehand事先把一切都准备好。
prepare for sth.
I have prepared for trouble.
prepare sb. for sth. 使某人为某事做好准备
prepare yourself for a possible failure.
be prepared for sth.为某事做好准备 be prepared to do sth.能够并愿意做某事
I knew there were problems, but I was not prepared for this!
I am prepared to lend you the money if you promise to pay it back.
preparation n.准备, 预备
8. miss vt
想念；思念：
Do you miss your family? 你想念家人吗?
错过；失去：
miss a chance. 错过一次机会
I was late because I missed the bus.
我迟到了，因为我误了公共汽车。
miss doing sth.
narrowly missed crashing into the tree. 差一点就撞到了树
9.experience
n.经验 (un)
Experience is their preparation for giving advice. 经验为她们进行咨询作了准备。
He is a teacher with much/great/little experience.
经历，阅历 (cn)
Please tell us your experiences in America.请你告诉我们你在美洲的经历。
Yesterday afternoon Frank Hawkins was telling me about his experiences as a young man.
”昨天下午,弗兰克.霍金斯给我讲述他年轻时的经历。“
vt. 体验；感受
to experience fear经历恐惧
He experienced all sorts of difficulties and hardships.他经历过一切艰难困苦。
experienced adj. 有经验的
He is an experienced teacher.= He is a teacher with much experience.
He is much experienced in teaching.他有丰富的教学经验。
10. introduce vt.介绍, 传入, 引进, 提出
introduce sb. to sb.
He introduced his friend to me. 他把朋友介绍给我。
introduction un.
This book gives a brief introduction to American culture.
11. immediately.
adv.立即, 马上, 直接地
She came immediately.她立刻就来了
conj.（连接词）As soon as; directly:马上；直接地：
They phoned immediately they reached home.= … as soon as they reached home.他们到家后马上打了电话
12.develop
vi. 发展, 生长, 发育, 逐步显示出来
The child is developing well. 这孩子发育良好。
Our country is developing quickly since liberation. 自解放以来我们的国家一直在快速发展。
vt.
培养，养成；发展, 逐步展开(情节,音乐主题,方程式等)；洗印
develop a habit 养成一个习惯 develop one’s interest in sth… 培养对某事的兴趣
develop the film 冲洗胶卷
13. donate vt
The businessman donated a lot of money to the hospital. 这个商人捐给医院很多钱。
donation n.捐赠；捐款
a donation of money to the hospital捐给医院的钱
14. display
vt. (displayed, displaying) 展示；给看；表现
The children's work was displayed on the wall. 孩子们的作品在墙上展出来了。
Mr Brown seemed to display no feelings when they told him the news.”他们把消息告诉布朗先生时,他好象无动于衷。“
The peacock displayed its fine tail feathers when it noticed any gay colours.
孔雀看到鲜艳的颜色就开屏。
n. 展示；陈列；表现
On New Year's Eve the display of fireworks offers many attractions. 除夕之夜的焰火很吸引人。
展览品；陈列品
All the parents were looking at the display of children's work.所有的父母都在看孩子们的作品展览。
on display= on show正在展览中
15. pay attention to 注意;关注
to 为介词，后接名词或动名词作宾语
Please pay attention to what the teacher says in class!
Did you pay attention to speaking clearly in yesterday’s interview?
16. please vt. 使喜欢, 中...的意, 使满足, 取悦
please sb. 取悦某人
It is difficult to please everybody. 很难做到人人满意
He is a very difficult man to please.
sb. be pleased with sth/sb. 某人对…感到满意
He is pleased with his new position.
17. regret
n. 憾, 悔恨, 抱歉, 歉意
express/feel regret at/about a missed opportunity 对错过良机表示、感到懊悔
I heard his death with great/deep regret.我听到他去世的消息感到万分悲痛
vt.为...感到遗憾, 后悔, 惋惜, 哀悼, 懊悔
I regret spending so much money on a car.我后悔在一辆小汽车上花这么多钱。
I regret to say I cannot come.很抱歉，我不能来了。
I regret that I cannot help. 很抱歉，此事爱莫能助。
18. inform
v. ( of/about/that)告诉, 获悉, 告知
The sales manager asked his men to inform him of everything concerning the sales in time.
销售部经理让他手下的人把关于销售量的情况及时报告他。
We were informed by mail of the change in plans. 我们被信告计划的改变。
The nurse informed me that visiting hours were over. 护士告诉我们探视时间已经结束
19. approve
vt.& vi.批准, 通过,赞成
The mayor（市长）approved the new building plans.市长批准了新建筑计划。
I don't approve of wasting time.我不赞成浪费时间。
20. require
require sth.
Most plants require sunlight.大部分植物需要阳光
require sb. to do sth.
Students are required to attend classes.学生必须按规定上课.
require doing= require to be done 需要被…
The floor requires washing.= The floor requires to be washed. 地板需要清洗。
require that…(宾语从句用虚拟语气should)
The situation requires that I should be there.情况需要我在那里。
requirement n需求, 要求
篇10：unit 1 grammar教案(译林牛津版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
The Attributive Clause
The General idea of this period:
This period will deal with the grammar part: the Attributive Clause. You will have systematic explanations of the Attributive Clause as well as some exercises to consolidate what you learn.
Teaching Aim:
Introduce attributive clause
Teaching important point:
The basic usage of the relative pronouns and learn to use them in different situations.
Teaching difficult point:
How to help the students to learn the grammar efficiently.
Teaching method:
Deduction to present the usage of the relative pronouns and then some exercises to consolidate what we have learned.
Teaching procedures:
Step1 Greetings
Step2 Presentation
Look at the picture at page8 and ask the students to speak out what they may think of.(Write down these three structures on the Bb or show them on the screen below the picture.)
Adjective: a green team
Prepositional phrase: a team in green
Attributive clause: a team who were wearing green
Attributive clause modifies a noun in the same way as adjective or prepositional phrase does. The noun it modifies is called an antecedent.
Read Part2 at page8. Attributive clauses are usually introduced by relative pronouns like which, that, who, whom, and whose, or relative adverbs like where, why and when. In the clause these relative words usually function as the following: (page8)
Step3 Read the article at page9 and underline the attributive clauses you find in the article.
Relative pronouns: that, which, who, whom and whose. Read this part at page10 and grasp the usages of these relative pronouns.(show the screen) Then do the exercise at page11.
Step4 Consolidation
Finish the exercises at page88
Step5 Homework
Complete the Attributive Clause exercises
篇11：牛津英语9A unit 1 词组(译林牛津版九年级英语上册教案教学设计)
UNIT1:
词组，短语
1， it is nice of you to do sth
2， bring me the newspaper
3， have lots to eat
4， worry about (not)dong sth
5， be familiar with
6， the 12 animals signs of the Chinese horoscope
7， people in the west
8， learn more about western culture
9， be divided into
10, people born under the same star
11,at times
12,like to be the leader
13,give up easily
14,take care of others
15save money
16,buy sb sth/ buy sth for sb
17,worry too much
18,pay attention to details
19,argue with others
20,love peace
21,keep secrets
22,forgive sb for one’s faults
23,have a good sence of humour
24,travel to different places
25,make and plan things
26,wait without getting angry
27,agree with each other
28,care only about oneself
29,treat everyone equally
30,feel sure about one’s ability
31,spend time /money doing sth
32,explain things to sb
33,show off
34,make such a mess
35,give each of us two gifts
36,the whole birthday cake
37,organize this party for us
38,be patient enough to do sth
39,be on the phone
40,have success at school or work
41,around the middle of the month
42,call Mr zhang on 84166488
43,have a mixture of good luck and bad luck
44,spend money wisely
45,have problems with my bike
46,get lots of rest
47,get sick
48,the same as
49,be suitable for
50,come up with=think of
51,be able to=can
52,have fun in doing sth
53,recommend sb as the new chairperson
54,try to be funny
55,finish all the summer homework
56,get full/good marks
57,forget to do sth
58,be afaid of doing sth
59,make a speech in assembly
60,show sb how to use the libriary
61,try one’s best
62,do extra work
63,get more organized
64,use sth to do
篇12：Phrases in the Unit 1 (译林牛津版高一英语必修二教案教学设计)
Phrases in the Unit
Unit 1
Page 1 to Page 5 [Welcome to the Unit1 to Reading]
1. carry out an interview 展开一个访问
2. can’t tell 无法判断
3. run into 偶遇
4. believe in sb. 相信某人
5. crop circle 麦圈
6. in charge of 负责，掌管
7. receive great interest受到关注
8. due to 由于
9. go straight to sp. 直接去某地
10. show up 出现、露面
11. do research on 做……的研究
12. take charge of 负责、掌管
13. make up 组成，编造，弥补
14. look into 调查
15. hard evidence 确凿的证据
16. according to 按照、依照
Page6-17[Word power, Grammar and Task]
17. go around the Earth环绕地球
18. send up into space把……发射升空
19. so far 到目前为止
20. dream of doing sth. 梦想着做某事
21. at a certain distance在某个距离
22. fall into 落入; 注入; 陷于
23. take off 脱下; 起飞; 移去; 休假
24. at a time 一次、每次
25. divide … into … 把……分成
26. state one’s opinion 发表某人的观点
27. be avoided 被避免
28. in return 作为回报
29. take turns to do sth. 轮流做某事
30. draw a conclusion 得出一个结论
31. make appropriate suggestions提出合理建议
32. base … on … 把……建立在……基础上
33. three more conclusions另外三个结论
Page 18 to Page 20[Project]
34. be similar to与……相似
35. dozens of许多
36. run after追赶
37. belong to 属于
38. be linked to 与……相关
39. make one’s way to 朝……方向
40. have the chance to do sth. 有机会做某事
41. leave out遗漏
42. space exploration太空探索
Unit 1
Page 1 to Page 5 [Welcome to the Unit1 to Reading]
1. carry out an interview ________________
2. can’t tell ____________________
3. run into _____________________
4. believe in sb. ____________________
5. crop circle _____________________
6. in charge of ____________________
7. receive great interest_________________
8. due to ___________________
9. go straight to sp. ____________________
10. show up ___________________
11. do research on _________________
12. take charge of ________________
13. make up _________________
14. look into _________________
15. hard evidence _______________
16. according to _______________
Page6-17[Word power, Grammar and Task]
17. go around the Earth_________________
18. send up into space_________________
19. so far _________________
20. dream of doing sth. _________________
21. at a certain distance_________________
22. fall into _________________
23. take off _________________
24. at a time _________________
25. divide … into … _________________
26. state one’s opinion _________________
27. be avoided _________________
28. in return _________________
29. take turns to do sth. _________________
30. draw a conclusion _________________
31. make appropriate suggestions____________
32. base … on … _________________
33. three more conclusions_________________
Page 18 to Page 20[Project]
34. be similar to_________________
35. dozens of_________________
36. run after_________________
37. belong to _________________
38. be linked to _________________
39. make one’s way to _________________
40. have the chance to do sth. _______________
41. leave out_________________
42. space exploration_________________
篇13：牛津高一英语模块1 Unit 1 表格式教案(译林牛津版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
主备人 Swan 授 课
时 间 .9．
教 学 目 标 1.Enable the Ss to pronounce the new words and expressions properly and freely.
2.Help the Ss to master the usages of some important new words and expressions.
3.Ask the students to learn the usage of the new words
教学重、难点 How to enable the Ss to master the pronunciations of some words and its basic usages.
Different forms of the new words.
教、 学 具 A projector and some slides
预习要 求 Preview the new words and the expressions of this unit.
教师活动内容、方式 学生活动内容、方式 旁注
语言点讲解
1.Attend .vt
（1）．Attend a meeting/school上课/a lecture/a class听课
（2）（take care of）照顾；护理；侍侯
n. attendance 出席；到场
attention: pay attention to
He is listening with attention.
Draw/attract one’s attention 引起某人的注意
2．Earn 赚得；earn one’s living 谋生/earn fame赢得名望
Earnings 工资，利润
3．Respect .vt
(1) respect sb for sth
I respect you for your honesty.
n. I have the greatest respect for you.
The new officer soon won/earned the respect of his men.
In respect of/to 关于，就……而言
I will give a speech in respect of the learning methods.
4. achieve success /victory/one’s purpose/aim
Achievement(n)
5.average .平均
Above (below) the average
The average temperature平均温度。
The average man普通的人
On average平均来说
6．Challenge :give a challenge挑战/accept a challenge应战
Beyond challenge无以伦比
Challenge sb challenge one’s intrest引起某人的兴趣
7．Free :set sb free 释放某人 be free to do be free
A free school 公费学校 free trade 自由贸易
free of charge=for free 免费
free kick (足球)罚球 free throw （篮球）罚球 free way高速公路
freedom of speech 言论自由
8．Extra :do extra work 加班
Extraordinary 非凡的，特别的。
9．Prepare one’s lessons/the table准备功课/准备开饭
Prepare for mental preparation 思想准备
In preparation for=prepare for
10．Drop sb a line 给某人写封便信
A few drops of rain drop asleep drop behind落后
Drop in on sb 顺便走访某人 drop off（一个一个地）走掉
11．Experience .n.经验（可数）；经历（不可数）
Learn by experience 从经验中学
Gain experience in teaching 获得教学经验
Vt. I experienced hard times
A experienced teacher 一位有经验的老师。
12．Immediately=at once
Conj: =as soon as=the moment
Immediately I arrived the airport, the plane took off.
13.gift :gift birthday
Have a gift for 对……有天赋
Gifted 有天赋的，有才华的。
14．Please .vt使满意，取悦 It’s difficult to please to him.
Be pleased with 对……满意
15．（1）掩盖,覆盖 be covered with
Lives can’t live up facts
（2）占（时间，空间）The city covers ten square miles.
(3)包括，涉及 His researches covered a wide field.
(4)走过，行（多少路程）cover twenty miles a day.
(5)对……进行采访，报道。The newspaper always covers the latest news.
16.regret to do
Regret doing regrettable. adj
17.inform sb that/sb of
He informed them of his arrival.
He is a well informed man .他是个消息灵通人士
Inform against sb控告某人 informer检举者。
18．Close .adj .
Be close to/a close friend
Adv. Stand/live close to (表示距离近)
Closely .adv(表示关系紧密，抽象)
The two questions are closely connected.
19.continue to do=continue doing
To be continued
Continuous .adj
20.select 慎重地选择适合自己的东西，精选 :select seeds
Choose 选择（普通用词）elect 选举
21．Require sb to do sth
Require that sb (should) do……
Require/need/want/doing=require/need/want to be done
n.requirement
22.scary adj 吓人的 /scare.vt使惊吓
The thunder scared the child.
Be scared to
Scare away/off吓走
Scare sb to death 把……吓死
23．Nature
Mother nature 大自然 go against nature 违背自然 return to nature
By nature 天生地 draw from nature写生
Chemists study the nature of gases.性质
课 题 M1U1 课时 16-2 Welcome 主备人 Swan 授 课
时 间 2008.9．
教 学 目 标 Give the students some impression of the school life in the UK.
Enlarge the Ss’ knowledge and make them know the importance of school life in one’s life
教学重、难点 Encourage the Ss to talk about their former school life and about their dream school life
To ensure very student to have a chance to express himself /herself．
教、 学 具 A projector and some slides
预习要 求 Preview the new words and the expressions of this unit.
教师活动内容、方式 学生活动内容、方式 旁注
Step l Greetings and Self- introduction
( Teacher may ask several students to give a self-introduction. This is a good chance for them to make themselves known. Meanwhile, the teacher may know about their Enlish level,)
Step 2 School Introduction
After several students have given their self-introduction，the teacher may transfer to introduce the new school and some activities that they may often have in the future.
T：Just now some of you introduced yourselves and said something about your former schools．Now we are here,so 1et me show you around the campus and have a look at school activities you may have in the future.
After showing some pictures of school buildings；the teacher may present them two columns of pictures of school activities, asking whether they had such activities or not.( One is about the school activities that your school often offers and the other column about activities in the UK.)
T： Do you like Such activities?
What kind of school activities do you 1ike?
StepIII Futher Discussion:
T: Just now you saw different pictures of school activities in China and in the UK. As is shown, there are some differences between them.
Do you know of any other differences between the lives of Chinese and British high school students?
StepIV Expectation
T: I think there are also some differences between our school and your former school. Since this is a new beginning, I want to ask you:
What do you want to get from this new school?
What is your dream school life like?
Step V Summary and Homework
1. Ask the ss to find out more differences between the lives of Chinese and British high school students.
2. Ask them to Preview Reading.
The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard
Bb design
Unit1 School life
Period 1
1. Do you know of any other differences between the lives of Chinese and British high school students?
2. What kind of school activities do you 1ike?
3. What is your dream school life like?
教后记：
课 题 M1U1 课时 16-3 Reading 主备人 Swan 授 课
时 间 2008.9．
教 学 目 标 Train the students’reading ability．
Learn some useful words and expressions．
Learn more about school life in the UK and the differences between school life in the UK and in China
教学重、难点 Help the students to understand the passage better.
Learn and master some important words and phrases in this period．
How to help the Students improve their reading ability and understand the passage better．
How to master the important 1anguage points in this passage．
教、 学 具 A projector and some slides
预习要 求 Preview the new words and the expressions of this unit.
教师活动内容、方式 学生活动内容、方式 旁注
The General idea of the period：
This period is about the reading of the passage Schoo1 Life in the UK. It will help you to learn more about school life in the UK and the difference
between that in the UK and in China．Meanwhile you can learn some reading
strategies such as skimming and scanning．．
Teaching Methods：
Fast reading to get the general idea of the text．
Careful reading to understand the passage better．
Discussion to help the students understand what they’ve 1earned better，
Explanation to help the students master some 1anguage points．
Teaching aids：
A tape recorder．
A multimedia
Teaching Procedures：
Step 1 Greetings
1．Greet the who1e c1ass as usual．
2。Check their homework if any。
Step 2 Reading
T：(Last time we learned about some difference between Chinese and British school life.today we are going to read a passage by Wei hua, who once studied in the UK .She will give us some detailed information about the school life in the UK.)
Let the ss skim the text quickly and answer these questions.(T shows the questions on the screen.)
1. How long did Wei Hua stay in Britain?(for one year)
2. What was he name of Wei hua’s class teacher?(Mr Heywood)
3. What did Wei hua make in her woodwork class?(A small table)
Then check the answers.Give the ss several minues to read the text and find more questions.
1. What time do British Schools usually begin?
2. What time do they usually end?
3. On average, how many ss are there in a class in the UK?
4. Why did Wei hua find her homework difficult at the beginning of her study in the UK?
5. On Tuesdays, what did Wei hua do in the evening?
6. What do British ss usually eat after their main meal?
7. Which British city did Wei hua go to?
(write down the new words the ss have just listed.)
(next,T may begib with the T/F questions orally and this is also a good time to test their listening abilities as well as their comprehension of the text.)
1. Wei hua likes the school hours in the UK.(T)
2. Chinese schools encourage students to work hard. (T)
3. Wei hua’s favorite teacher was Miss Burke. (T)
4. British students have fixed classrooms andclassmates.(F)
5. British students can only study two languages :Engliash and French. (F)
6. British students eat a lot of fruit. (T)
7. Wei hua enjoyed playing football. (F)
StepIII Homework
Ask the ss to read aloud the text
Ask them to finish the exercises
Blackboard design:
Period 3
1.How long did Wei Hua stay in Britain?
2.What was he name of Wei hua’s class teacher
3.What did Wei hua make in her woodwork class?
教后记：
课 题 M1U1 课时 16-4
Language Points 主备人 Swan 授 课
时 间 2008.9．
教 学 目 标 Learn some useful words and expressions
教学重、难点 Introduction to attributive clauses
教、 学 具 A projector and some slides
预习要 求 Preview the new words and the expressions of this unit.
教师活动内容、方式 学生活动内容、方式 旁注
Teaching Procedures：
Step 1 Revision:
1．Have a dictation.
2.Check their homework if any.
Step2 Language points
1. Going to a British high school for one year was a very enjoyable and exciting experience for me.
此处Going to a British high school for one year是动名词短语作为主语，类似的：Seeing is believing.
Talking with foreigners is a good way to improve one’s English.
另外：动名词也可以作为表语和宾语。
e.g My job is teaching your English.
I can’t help expressing my good feeling about An Yi Middle school.
2.usual 意为：通常的；习惯上的
Coffee is the usual drink in Western countries.
This is his usual seat.
As usual
As usual, he didn’t pass the exam.
2. earn/gain/win/respect from
3. respectable,值得尊敬的；相当多的
He has respectable knowledge on universe. 相当多的
respectful尊敬的，有礼貌的 a respectful scientist.
4.Sound like 听起来像
That sounds like a good idea.
It sounds like the hurricane coming.
Sound 听起来……
What he said just now sounded reasonable.
5．So it was difficult to remember all the faces and names.
It is +adj.+to do sth.
It is necessary to learn about the weather forecast before you go out.
It is wrong to give the children whatever he like.
6. used to do
Be used to do
Get/be used to doing/sth
7.a bit of =a little 一点（修饰不可数名词
Not a little 很，十分 not a bit=not at all一点也不
8.as well as “除……还有”“不但，而且”
The teacher as well as his students was fond of classic music.
She is clever as well as beautiful
She had to support his family, as well as studying in the school.
stepIII erercises.
Ask the ss to finish the exercises ,then check the answer.
教后记：
课 题 M1U1 课时 16-5 Word Power 主备人 Swan 授 课
时 间 2008.9．
教 学 目 标 Learn to read a map
Enlarge our vocabulary by learning about school facilities
教学重、难点 Help the Ss to find the way and express themselves in English.
Some common techniques to enlarge our vocabulary.
How to express themselves in English when finding the way.
Master some techniques to enlarge vocabulary.
教、 学 具 A projector and some slides
预习要 求 Preview the new words and the expressions of this unit.
教师活动内容、方式 学生活动内容、方式 旁 注
StepI Revision
1.Review the exx.
2.Check their homework if any.
StepII. Lead-in:
1. Ask the Ss to recall the first day they came to this school. Ask them if they had any difficulty in finding their way to their classroom or any other buildings that day.
2. Encourage the Ss to think of the patterns they learned in junior high.
* Excuse me, can you tell me the way to ….?
Excuse me, which is the nearest way to ….?
Excuse me, how can I get to / arrive at / reach ….?
*Turn right/ left, and walk straight on. At the end of the first / second crossing, you will find it on your right/ left. You can’t it.
*Walk towards / past…, and then walk between … and …. You will find … at the end of the road.
StepIII. Reading the map:
1. When we go the a place for the first time, a map is very helpful. It can help us to get familiar with the place soon and find our destinations quickly. Do you often take a map when you go to somewhere?
2. Encourage more students to talk about the following questions such as: which facility attracts you most in our school? Why? Help the students to recall related words and expressions
What do you think of our canteen? How about the gym? Is our car park ok in the school?
Encourage them to express their genuine opinions.
3. Ask students to focus on the map of Part A first. Read Wei Hua’s thoughts quickly and match her routes on the map. Remind students to pay attention to the usage of the words and expressions on the map.
StepIV.Vocabulary learning
1. Ask students to do Part B. Write a description of the quickest way to get from the dormitories to class 4 and read it to the class.
Sample answers
B If you are standing at the door of the dormitories, first turn right and go past the medical centre and the gym, then turn left and walk until the end of the road. Classroom is on your left.
2. If possible, design some more samples for the students to practise. For example, ask students to mark the shortest way from the science laboratory to classrooms 16-25. This exercise encourages students to familiarize the phrases of finding the way.
3. Ask students to read Part C and complete it. Check the new words in the passage while they give the answers. Aim to make sure the students have done the repairing work of looking up possible new points in the dictionaries before class. available, qualified, access.
Answers
C 1 car park 2 classrooms 3 library 4 labs 5 gym 6 swimming pool 7 dormitories 8 medical centre 9 canteen
StepV.Vocabulary extension
1. Focus on the equipments of Part D. Ask students to name out some of their names if possible. Then teach new items. Help them to know about each gymnastic items.
2. Ask students to finish Part D and encourage them to have a short discussion like: Do you think it’s important for schools to have a gym? How do you like these equipments?
Answers
D 4 beam 7 barbell 1 climbing bars 6 basketball court 2 rings 8 mat 3 dumb-bell 5 skipping rope
StepVI. Homework
1. let the students to remember all the useful words and expressions in Part A, B, and D . Learn to make sentences with the key words in Part C.
2. Do Part A and B in writing on Page 85.
3. Pick out attributive clauses in the passage of Part C.
课 题 M1U1 课时 16-6 Grammar
and usage 主备人 Swan 授 课
时 间 2008.9．
教 学 目 标 Introduce attributive clause
Teaching important points：The basic usage of the relative pronouns and learn to use them in different situations.
教学重、难点 How to help the students to learn the grammar efficiently.
教、 学 具 A projector and some slides
预习要 求 Preview the new words and the expressions of this unit.
教师活动内容、方式 学生活动内容、方式 旁 注
Teaching procedures:
StepI Revision
1.Review the Word Power
2.Check their homework if any.
StepII Presentation
Look at the picture at page8 and ask the students to speak out what they may think of.(Write down these three structures on the Bb or show them on the screen below the picture.)
Adjective: a green team
Prepositional phrase: a team in green
Attributive clause: a team who were wearing green
Attributive clause modifies a noun in the same way as adjective or prepositional phrase does. The noun it modifies is called an antecedent.
Read Part2 at page8. Attributive clauses are usually introduced by relative pronouns like which, that, who, whom, and whose, or relative adverbs like where, why and when. In the clause these relative words usually function as the following: (page8)
StepIII.the usage of relative pronouns：
1． 作主语用who, which和that, 如：
He is the man who/that lives next door.
The train which/that has just left is for Shenzhen.
2． 作宾语用whom, who, which, that, 如：
The man (whom/who/that) we have just seen is a famous writer.
Where is the book (which/that) I bought last week?
注：在非正式文体中，用于指人的关系代词who whom, that 通常可以省略，但在正式文体中通常用whom, 不可省略；用于指物的关系代词which和that 在非正式文体中也通常省略，但在正式文体中一般不省略。
3． 作定语用whose, 如：
(a) He is the man whose car was stolen last week.
(b) It was a meeting whose importance I did not realize at that time.
注：“whose +名词中心词”这一结构在定语从句中既能作主语（如上a句），又能作宾语（如上b句）。whose 的先行词常用来指人，但有时也可以用来指具体事物或抽象概念，这时可以与of which 结构互换，词序是：“名词+of which”，如：
They came to a house whose back wall had broken down.. (= the back wall of which)
He’s written a book the name of which I’ve completely forgotten. (= whose name)
4． 作表语只用that ，它既可以指人，也可以指物，但时常省略。如：
He is no longer the man that he used to be.
This is no longer the dirty place (that) it used to be
StepIV. Read the article at page9 and underline the attributive clauses you find in the article.
Relative pronouns: that, which, who, whom and whose. Read this part at page10 and grasp the usages of these relative pronouns.(show the screen) Then do the exercise at page11.
StepV. Consolidation
Finish the exercises at page88
StepVI. Homework
Complete the Attributive Clause exercises
课 题 M1U1 课时 16-7 Task 1 主备人 Swan 授 课
时 间 2008.9．
教 学 目 标 To help the students 1earn the skills of reading a program and comparing information
教学重、难点 Skills of reading a program and comparing information
How to master the skill of reading a program and how to pick out the usefu1 information by comparing it.
教、 学 具 A projector and some slides
预习要 求 Preview the new words and the expressions of this unit.
教师活动内容、方式 学生活动内容、方式 旁注
Step I Revision
1.Review the Word Power
2.Check their homework if any.
Step II Presentation
T：These days we are very busy．Tom，do you know what is happening?
Sl：Teachers’Day is coming．
T，Got it．What is the date of Teachers’Day?
S2：Sept．10th.
T：What day is this Teachers’Day?
SS：Saturday．
T：Do you have any special activities?
S3：We’re going to have a ceremony to celebrate it．
T：Really? Where and when?
S4：We are going to have a party from 3 p.m．at the lecture hall．
T：Good，I will go there then．Thanks for telling me about your program．
A program is a plan of activities to be done or things to be achieved．Do you know what a program includes?
S5: date，day，dime，venue，event／activity
T：Very good，Dates in a program are usually presented in Short form to save space．For example：
1stJanuary一1st／1Jan
9th September--9th／9 Sept．
Days refer to days in a week．They can a1so be presented in short forms．
Do you know their shortforms?
S：：Yes．Sunday--Sun
Thursday-Thur.
T：Quite good ! Time can be presented in several ways．Let’s look at the screen：
9 a.m．／09．00
4 p．m．／16．00
8．50 a.m．／08．50
6．45p．m．／18．45
Events or activities are the most important part of a program．For example:
A speech on Chinese history
Art festival
sports meeting
Opening ceremony
At last 1et’s have a look at venue．Venue refers to the place where events take place．For example：
assembly hall
meeting room 7th floor, Park Hotel
Step III Listening
Deal with two forms of p12 and p13
Step IV Homework
Finish off the Exx.
教后记
课 题 M1U1 课时 16-8 Task 2 主备人 Swan 授 课
时 间 2008.9．
教 学 目 标 To help the students 1earn the skills of comparing information and writing a notice
教学重、难点 Skills of comparing information and write a notice
How to master the skill of comparing information and how to pick out the usefu1 information by comparing it.
教、 学 具 A projector and some slides
预习要 求 Preview the new words and the expressions of this unit.
教师活动内容、方式 学生活动内容、方式 旁 注
StepI Revision
1.Review the grammar
2.Check their homework if any.
StepII Presentation
T: We often make decisions by comparing information.There are two main
points that you should note when making comparisons：
1．When comparing，you must read all the information carefully before you make any decisions.．
2 .It is better to make as many comparisons as you can．The more choices you have, the better your final decisions will be.
T：Compare your class time table with the program above.
(dealing with Step2 and skills building3.then check the answers.)
StepIII Summary and homework
T: today we’ve learned two skills: reading a program and comparing information. They are so practical so don’t forget them in your studies. Your homework is to prepare ab English edition of our school program of Teachers’Day.
教后记：
课 题 M1U1 课时 16-9 Assessment 主备人 Swan 授 课
时 间 2008.9．
教 学 目 标 To learn two articles about after-school activities in school
To learn the use of “as , require”
To find out how an activity attracts the students and helps the students
教学重、难点 The form of a notice in English and understand the outline of starting a school club.
教、 学 具 A projector and some slides
预习要 求 Preview the new words and the expressions of this unit.
教师活动内容、方式 学生活动内容、方式 旁 注
Step 1: Listen to the recording of the articles on page 18
True or False questions:
1. The radio station is run by the principal.
2. The radio station started 2 years ago when CD players were allowed in school.
3. Members of Poets of the Next Generation meet up on the last Friday of every month.
4. Everyone was nice and friendly in the group. They liked the first poem Bob read to them.
Step 2: Read the two articles and answer the following questions:
What do the student members in the radio station do during exam time?
What do they do when parents come to visit the school?
Who started “Poets of the Next Generation”?
What do the members of the group do when they meet?
Step 3: Fill in the blanks:
The radio station in our school is ____ by the student. Two years ago, I asked the ________ if music could be played during _____ ____. He agreed.
We tell students the _______, _____ _____ and some special messages. During _____ ____ we tell the students what they ______ or _________ do for preparation. When parents come, we play songs _____ by students and _____ them of ______, such as _________ and ______ _____.
Our English teacher Mr Owen started the group “_____________________________”. Group members ____________ to talk about ________ and _______ that we like.
When I _______ it, I was ________ to write five poems and _____ one ____ to the group. I ______ every one around a tree before I read. The group said they loved the poem I read.
Step 4: Vocabulary and language points:
allow: permit sb./sth. to do sth.
principal: person with the highest authority in certain schools
generation: all people born at about the same time
select: choose sb./sth.
calm: not excited, nervous
require: order or command sth.
The use of as and require
Step 4: Discussion
How do these two activities attract the students?
How do they help the students?
Step5 Homework:
Try to find the answers to the following questions:
What after-school activities do you have in your school?
Do you like them? Why/ Why not?
If you could start a new after-school activity to enjoy with your schoolmates, what new activity would you choose?
教后记：
课 题 M1U1 课时 16-10 Project 1 主备人 Swan 授 课
时 间 2008.9．
教 学 目 标 To learn two articles about after-school activities in school
To learn the use of as and require
To find out how an activity attracts the students and helps the students
教学重、难点 The form of a notice in English and understand the outline of starting a school club.
教、 学 具 A projector and some slides
预习要 求 Preview the new words and the expressions of this unit.
教师活动内容、方式 学生活动内容、方式 旁 注
Step 1: Check homework
Every student has to tell their classmates what after-school activities they would like to start if they could. Form groups of members with the same choice and every group consists of at least four students.
Step 2: Plan
Discuss the tasks listed below and decide which group members will be responsible for what tasks.
Research information:
Make the poster:
Present the poster:
Step 3: Prepare
Members responsible for doing research need to find information from various sources about after-school activities and posters.
Activity: What does it do? How does it attract new members? How does it help members achieve their goals?
Poster: What does the poster consist of? How does it attract its viewers?
Step 4: Produce
Group members who are making the poster will have to draft the poster based on all the ideas from our previous research and discussion.
When the draft is done, each member should read it carefully and give suggestions on its wording and design.
Step5 Homework
The poster makers finalizes the poster based on the suggestions of the other group members.
The entire group approve the poster before next period.
In next period, they are to present their poster to the class. Tell the class what is special about their activity.
教后记：
课 题 M1U1 课时 16-11 Project 2 主备人 Swan 授 课
时 间 2008.9．
教 学 目 标 1.Enable the Ss to pronounce the new words and expressions properly and freely.
2.Help the Ss to master the usages of some important new words and expressions.
教学重、难点 How to enable the Ss to master the pronunciations of some words and its basic usages.
教、 学 具 A projector and some slides
预习要 求 Preview the new words and the expressions of this unit.
教师活动内容、方式 学生活动内容、方式 旁 注
Step 1: Check homework
Every student has to tell their classmates what after-school activities they would like to start if they could. Form groups of members with the same choice and every group consists of at least four students.
Step 2: Plan
Discuss the tasks listed below and decide which group members will be responsible for what tasks.
Research information:
Make the poster:
Present the poster:
Step 3: Prepare
Members responsible for doing research need to find information from various sources about after-school activities and posters.
Activity: What does it do? How does it attract new members? How does it help members achieve their goals?
Poster: What does the poster consist of? How does it attract its viewers?
Step 4: Produce
Group members who are making the poster will have to draft the poster based on all the ideas from our previous research and discussion.
When the draft is done, each member should read it carefully and give suggestions on its wording and design.
Step5 Homework
The poster makers finalizes the poster based on the suggestions of the other group members.
The entire group approve the poster before next period.
In next period, they are to present their poster to the class. Tell the class what is special about their activity.
教后记：
课 题 M1U1 课时 16-12 Revision of the new words(I) 主备人 Swan 授 课
时 间 2008.9．
教 学 目 标 To have a revision of this unit
教学重、难点 The usage of the new words
教、 学 具 A projector and some slides
预习要 求 Preview the new words and the expressions of this unit.
教师活动内容、方式 学生活动内容、方式 旁 注
StepI Revision
Check the homework
Step II Presentation
Step I Revision
1. attend vt. 出席, 参加
1) 出席，参加 ，vt. 后跟的宾语一般是meeting, conference, lecture，school, ceremony, church (school, church前一般不加冠词)
如：Did you attend the meeting?
He will attend school till he is sixteen.
辨析：attend , join, join sb (in doing) sth. , join in, take part in
attend表示出席，参加（会议，讲座，婚礼，听报告等），去上学，法院等）
join表示成为某个团体的一员（如参军、入党等）
join sb. (in doing sth.)表示和某人一起做某事。
You are too young to join the army
I’ll join you in a few minutes
join in 表示参加某种活动
take part in 多指参加（讨论、辩论或群众性活动）
May I join in the game?
John takes part in many school activities.
2) 照料 （某人）爱护 （某人） vt&vi.
She has two nurses attending (on) her.
2. earn vt.赚, 挣得, 获得
earn + 名词
earned money by teaching
earn respect from school
She earned a reputation as a hard worker.
勤劳的工作使她享有声誉
He has earned a lot of money by working in the evenings.
他利用晚上工作，已经挣了好多钱。
3. respect
n.尊敬, 敬重, 注意, 考虑, 尊重, 关系, 有关 (un)
have /show respect for …
to pay (have) respect to留心于…， 考虑…
Child should show respect for their teachers
We must have respect for/ pay respect to the needs of the general needs.我们必须考虑到一般读者的需要。
敬意，问候 (pl.)
pay one's respects.表示敬意
Give my respects to your wife.= Give my regards to your wife请代我向你太太问好。
in all respects无论从哪方面来看
in respect of关于；就…来说
vt. 尊敬；尊重
I respect his courage.我敬佩他的勇气。
I'll respect your wishes.我尊重你的愿望。
Usually people don't respect those who are too compliant.
”一般来说人们看不起那种唯命是从,唯唯诺诺的人。“
4. achieve vt.
完成；实现
The university has achieved all its goals this year.
这个大学今年已经实现了所有的奋斗目标。
达到；获得
He hopes to achieve all his aims soon.他希望尽快达到所有目标。
achievement n.成就；成绩；成功
5. average
n.平均,平均水平,平均数
The average of 4, 8, and 60 is 24.
adj.一般的, 通常的,平均的
What is the average rainfall for August in your country? 你们国家八月份的平均降雨量是多少?
The average age of the students is 16.
His study is average in our class.
on (the/ an) average 通常；按平均
We fail one student per year on average.我们平均每年有一个学生不及格。
6. for free--- without payment adv.免费地（=free of charge）
He got the ticket for free.他获得免费票
They put on the play free of charge.他们举行义演。
free adj.自由的, 大方的, 免费的, 免税的, 丰富的, 空闲的
freedom un.自由
give slaves their freedom= set slaves free
7. prepare vt&vi
prepare sth.
prepare a meal 准备饭菜 have everything prepared beforehand事先把一切都准备好。
prepare for sth.
I have prepared for trouble.
prepare sb. for sth. 使某人为某事做好准备
prepare yourself for a possible failure.
be prepared for sth.为某事做好准备 be prepared to do sth.能够并愿意做某事
I knew there were problems, but I was not prepared for this!
I am prepared to lend you the money if you promise to pay it back.
preparation n.准备, 预备
8. miss vt
想念；思念：
Do you miss your family? 你想念家人吗?
错过；失去：
miss a chance. 错过一次机会
I was late because I missed the bus.
我迟到了，因为我误了公共汽车。
miss doing sth.
narrowly missed crashing into the tree. 差一点就撞到了树
StepII exercises:
Do the workbook.
教后记：
课 题 M1U1 课时 16-13 Revision of the new words(2) 主备人 Swan 授 课
时 间 2008.9．
教 学 目 标 Revise new words
教学重、难点 The usage of new words
教、 学 具 A projector and some slides
预习要 求 Preview the new words and the expressions of this unit.
教师活动内容、方式 学生活动内容、方式 旁 注
StepI Revision
Check the homework
Step II Presentation
9.experience
n.经验 (un)
Experience is their preparation for giving advice. 经验为她们进行咨询作了准备。
He is a teacher with much/great/little experience.
经历，阅历 (cn)
Please tell us your experiences in America.请你告诉我们你在美洲的经历。
Yesterday afternoon Frank Hawkins was telling me about his experiences as a young man.
”昨天下午,弗兰克.霍金斯给我讲述他年轻时的经历。“
vt. 体验；感受
to experience fear经历恐惧
He experienced all sorts of difficulties and hardships.他经历过一切艰难困苦。
experienced adj. 有经验的
He is an experienced teacher.= He is a teacher with much experience.
He is much experienced in teaching.他有丰富的教学经验。
10. introduce vt.介绍, 传入, 引进, 提出
introduce sb. to sb.
He introduced his friend to me. 他把朋友介绍给我。
introduction un.
This book gives a brief introduction to American culture.
11. immediately.
adv.立即, 马上, 直接地
She came immediately.她立刻就来了
conj.（连接词）As soon as; directly:马上；直接地：
They phoned immediately they reached home.= … as soon as they reached home.他们到家后马上打了电话
12.develop
vi. 发展, 生长, 发育, 逐步显示出来
The child is developing well. 这孩子发育良好。
Our country is developing quickly since liberation. 自解放以来我们的国家一直在快速发展。
vt.
培养，养成；发展, 逐步展开(情节,音乐主题,方程式等)；洗印
develop a habit 养成一个习惯 develop one’s interest in sth… 培养对某事的兴趣
develop the film 冲洗胶卷
13. donate vt
The businessman donated a lot of money to the hospital. 这个商人捐给医院很多钱。
donation n.捐赠；捐款
a donation of money to the hospital捐给医院的钱
14. display
vt. (displayed, displaying) 展示；给看；表现
The children's work was displayed on the wall. 孩子们的作品在墙上展出来了。
Mr Brown seemed to display no feelings when they told him the news.”他们把消息告诉布朗先生时,他好象无动于衷。“
The peacock displayed its fine tail feathers when it noticed any gay colours.
孔雀看到鲜艳的颜色就开屏。
n. 展示；陈列；表现
On New Year's Eve the display of fireworks offers many attractions. 除夕之夜的焰火很吸引人。
展览品；陈列品
All the parents were looking at the display of children's work.所有的父母都在看孩子们的作品展览。
on display= on show正在展览中
15. pay attention to 注意;关注
to 为介词，后接名词或动名词作宾语
Please pay attention to what the teacher says in class!
Did you pay attention to speaking clearly in yesterday’s interview?
16. please vt. 使喜欢, 中...的意, 使满足, 取悦
please sb. 取悦某人
It is difficult to please everybody. 很难做到人人满意
He is a very difficult man to please.
sb. be pleased with sth/sb. 某人对…感到满意
He is pleased with his new position.
StepII exercises:
Do the workbook.
教后记：
课 题 M1U1 课时 16-14 Revision of new words(3) 主备人 Swan 授 课
时 间 2008.9．
教 学 目 标 Revision of the new words(3)
教学重、难点 The usage of the new words
教、 学 具 A projector and some slides
预习要 求 Preview the new words and the expressions of this unit.
教师活动内容、方式 学生活动内容、方式 旁 注
Step I Revision
Check the homework
Step II Presentation
17. regret
n. 憾, 悔恨, 抱歉, 歉意 express/feel regret at/about a missed opportunity 对错过良机表示、感到懊悔
I heard his death with great/deep regret.我听到他去世的消息感到万分悲痛
vt.为...感到遗憾, 后悔, 惋惜, 哀悼, 懊悔
I regret spending so much money on a car.我后悔在一辆小汽车上花这么多钱。
I regret to say I cannot come.很抱歉，我不能来了。
I regret that I cannot help. 很抱歉，此事爱莫能助。
18. inform v. ( of/about/that)告诉, 获悉, 告知
The sales manager asked his men to inform him of everything concerning the sales in time.
销售部经理让他手下的人把关于销售量的情况及时报告他。
We were informed by mail of the change in plans. 我们被信告计划的改变。
The nurse informed me that visiting hours were over. 护士告诉我们探视时间已经结束
19. approve vt.& vi.批准, 通过,赞成
The mayor（市长）approved the new building plans.市长批准了新建筑计划。
I don't approve of wasting time.我不赞成浪费时间。
20. require
require sth.
Most plants require sunlight.大部分植物需要阳光
require sb. to do sth.
Students are required to attend classes.学生必须按规定上课.
require doing= require to be done 需要被…
The floor requires washing.= The floor requires to be washed. 地板需要清洗。
require that…(宾语从句用虚拟语气should)
The situation requires that I should be there.情况需要我在那里。
requirement n需求, 要求
Step II exercises: Do the workbook.
教后记：
课 题 M1U1 课时 16-15 Revision of the grammar(1) 主备人 Swan 授 课
时 间 2008.9．
教 学 目 标 To have a revision of the grammar
教学重、难点 The usage of the Attributive clause
教、 学 具 A projector and some slides
预习要 求 Preview the new words and the expressions of this unit.
教师活动内容、方式 学生活动内容、方式 旁 注
StepI Revision
Check the homework
StepII Presentation
关系词的选择
1． 在非限制性定语从句中，关系代词作主语，只能用who 指人，which指物；关系代词做宾语，常用whom（口语中有时用who）指人，which指物，它们都不能用that代替。
2． 关系代词作介词宾语，不论是在限制性定语从句中，还是在非限制性定语从句中，当介词前置时，只能用whom指人，which指物；但如果介词后置，则不受这种限制，关系代词还可以省去，特别是在口语中。如：
Do you know the boy to whom she was talking?
Do you know the boy (that) she was talking to?
The pencil (which/that) he was writing with suddenly broke.
3． 在限制性定语从句中，当先行词指物时，关系词可用which或that，二者常可以互换；但在下列情况中，只能用that，不用which：
(1) 当先行词是all, a lot, (a) little, few, much, none, anything, something, everything, nothing等词时。如：
All that can be done has been done.
In this factory I saw little / much that was different from ours.
(2) 当先行词被all, any no, much, little, few, every等限定词所修饰时。如：
We heard clearly every word that he said.
(3) 当先行词是序数词或被序数词所修饰时。如：
The first thing that should be done is to get the tickets.
When people talk about Hangzhou, the first that comes to mind is the West Lake.
(4) 当先行词是形容词最高级或被形容词最高级所修饰，以及先行词被序数词和形容
词最高级同时修饰时，如：
Is that the best that you can do?
That’s the most expensive hotel that we’ve ever stayed in.
This novel is the second best one that I have ever read.
(5) 当先行词被 the very, the only, the next, the last等所修饰时。如：
This is the very book that I want to find.
(6) 当先行词为指人和指物的两个并列名词词组时。如：
The guests spoke highly of the children and their performances that they saw at the Children’s Palace.
She described in her compositions the people and places that impressed her most.
(7) 当主句是以which开头的特殊疑问句时。如：
Which is the car that killed the boy?
4. 在限制性定语从句中，当先行词指人时，关系词可用who(m)或that，二者常可互换。
但在下列情况中，用who(m)，而不用that：
(1) 当先行词是one, ones, any, few, anyone, anybody, someone, somebody, everyone,
everybody等词时。如：
Is there anyone who can answer this question?
He was among the few who managed to live through the enemy prison camp.
注：在非正式文体中可以说：You’re the one that knows where to go.)
(2) 当先行词是he, they, those, people, person等词时。如：
He who wants to catch fish just not mind getting wet.
Those who are against the proposal put up your hands.
注：在固定结构的谚语或习语中，可用he that…。如：
He that promises too much means nothing.
(3) 当先行词有较长的后置定语修饰时。如：
Do you know the writer in blue with thick glasses who is speaking at the meeting?
(4) 在分隔式定语从句中，若先行词指人，为了明确修饰关系，应当用who(m)。如：
A new master will came tomorrow who will teach you German.
There’s only one student in the school who/whom I wanted to see.
I was the only person in my office who was invited.
(5) 两个定语从句同时修饰一个指人的先行词，第二个定语从句常用who(m)来引导，如：
She is the only girl I know who can play the guitar.
5. 在限制性定语从句中，当先行词指人时，在下列情况中，一般用关系词that:
(1) 当主句是以who或which开头的特殊疑问句时。如：
Who is the man that is reading the newspaper over there?
Which of us that knows anything does not know this?
(2) 当先行词被形容词最高级或序数词所修饰时。如：
He is the greatest man that has ever lived.
(3) 当先行词被the only, the very, the last等词所修饰时。如：
She is the only person that understands me.
StepII exercises:
Do the workbook.
教后记：
课 题 M1U1 课时 16-16 Revision of the grammar(2) 主备人 Swan 授 课
时 间 2008.9．
教 学 目 标 To have a revision of the grammar
教学重、难点 The usage of the Attributive clause
教、 学 具 A projector and some slides
预习要 求 Preview the new words and the expressions of this unit.
教师活动内容、方式 学生活动内容、方式 旁 注
StepI Revision
Check the homework
StepII Presentation
6. 当先行词被the same所修饰时，关系词既可以用as，也可以用that。在表示具体事物
时，有时两者有一定的区别。一般说来，表示同一种类多用as，表示同一事物多用that。
如：
This is the same instrument that I used yesterday. 这就是我昨天用过的那台仪器。
This is the same instrument as I used yesterday. 这台仪器跟我昨天用过的那台一样。
在抽象概念上，同种类和同一事物是没有绝对区别的，所以两个词可换用：
I have the same opinion as / that you have.
这里要注意的是：
（1） 使用as时，它引导的定语从句中的动词可以省略，但使用that时，定语从句中
的动词不可省略。如：
Women received the same pay as men.
Women received the same pay that men received.
(2) 在“the same…that”结构中，that只是用来加强语气，强调“相同”。that可以省去而不改变句子原意，甚至连名词前的same也可以省去。如：
This is the same instrument that I used yesterday.
= This is the same instrument I used yesterday.
= This is the instrument I used yesterday.
但在“the same…as”结构中，same和as都不能省略。
(3) 当“the same…that”结构中的that作为关系副词用时，不可以直接与as互换。
如：
He lives in the same building that I live.
= He lives in the same building as / that I live in.
Shall we meet at the same place that we last met?
= Shall we meet at the same place that / as we last met at?
7. 当先行词前有such, so, as时，关系词应当用as。如：
A wise man seldom talks about such things as he doesn’t understand.
He spoke in such easy English as everybody could understand.
At this time of the day, all buses and trolleys have to carry as many passengers as they can.
It is so easy a book as every schoolboy can read.
StepIII exercises:
Do the workbook.
’s discuss such things as we can talk of freely.
教后记：
篇14：牛津版高一必修三 Unit 1 welcome to the unit 教案教学设计(译林牛津版英语高一)
高一英语课堂教学设计案例
（牛津版高一必修三 Unit 1 welcome to the unit ）
东流中学 张郁
一、 教学内容分析
1.本课是导入课, 重点培养学生的看说能力。
2.要求学生了解人类特有的五种感官
3.利用课本page94所给的关于贝多芬的短文，要求学生以自己的语言对他做个简单的评价。
二、学生学习情况分析
《高中英语新课程标准》明确指出：“高中英语课程要有利于学生优化英语学习方法，使他们通过观察、体验、探究等积极主动的学习方法，充分发挥自己的学习潜能，形成有效的学习策略，提高自主学习的能力。”
根据《高中英语新课程标准》要求，结合我班学生英语基础与能力较弱的实际，本课时我把每个教学环节所设计的问题和任务区分出高低不同的层次，由浅入深，循序渐进，使每个教学环节尽量符合多数学生的认知水平，力争全班绝大多数同学都能积极参与课堂活动。通过“任务型”活动培养学生 “听”、“说”、“观察”、“讨论”、“推理归纳”等能力。
三、设计思想
英语教学是一种动态教学或活动教学，教学过程是交际活动过程。只有从组织教学活动入手，大量地进行语言实践，使英语课堂交际化，才能有效地培养学生运用英语进行交际的能力。新课标提出：“外国语是学习文化科学知识，获取世界各方面信息和进行国际交往的重要工具。”和“……发展听、说、读、写的基本技能，提高初步运用英语进行交际的能力，……”，结合本班学生的实际，教师本人的自身特点和东流中学高二年段的实际教学条件，采用了处理教学过程中拟实践的教育理念、教学原则、教学方法。在本课教学中，我突出以five senses为主线运用整体阅读教学法，“任务型”活动和多媒体辅助教学等各种方法组织指导学生了解五种感官，提高他们听，说，读，看，讨论，辨认，评论，的综合技能与技巧。
四、教学方法
1.任务驱动教学法：
将所要学习的新知识隐含在一个或几个问题之中，学生通过对所提的任务进行分析、讨论，并在老师的指导和帮助下找出解决问题的方法，最后通过任务的完成而实现对所学知识的意义建构。以“任务型”教学作为课堂教学设计之理念，具体采用分层次教学法和交际教学法。学生通过表演、听说等各种语言形式来学习和掌握语言，实现目标，感受成功。
2.英语教学和情感教育的有机结合:
在本节课中，教师除了营造宽松气氛，给予学生展示成功的平台外，处处鼓励学生运用自主学习、合作学习和探究学习等新的学习方式，以形成积极的学习态度，促进语言实际运用能力的提高。这是实施新课程最为核心和关键的环节。
3.交际法:
从心理语言学的角度来考察，语言同交际或交流始终紧密相联，语言功能首先就是交际功能。教师在教学内容上以“功能项目为纲”，力求使教学过程交际化，以培养外语交际的真本领。
五．教学目标 (三维目标)
新课标提出：英语课程的学习，既是学生通过英语学习和实践活动，逐步掌握英语知识和技能，提高语言实际运用能力的过程；又是他们陶冶情操、拓展视野、丰富社会经历、开发思维能力和提高人文素养的过程。本课所有的语言知识和语言技能都是围饶“five senses”这一中心主题而设计的。因此，我把本课的教学目标确定为：
1． 语言知识与技能目标：
1）熟练掌握新的常用词汇及主要语言表达形式。
2) 帮助学生提高听，说，读，看，讨论，辨认，评论，的综合技能与技巧。
3）学生之间能交流、合作，共同就 given topics较好地完成一些开放性话题。
2． 情感态度与文化意识目标
1) 在有趣的主题激励下，师生互动，生生互动，调动学生的学习兴趣，加强教师的亲和力，增进彼此的了解与沟通，充分发挥情感教学的优势。
2）让学生在共同完成一些交流、认知等任务的过程中，加强团体协作意识。
3. 过程与方法
自上而下的阅读模式；发现式的语法词汇学习；小组合作的体验式，探究式的评论；
六．教学重点和难点
1.Talk about the function of humans' five senses and the relations between them.
2.Develop student's speaking and discussion facility through talking about the renowned disabled people ,such as Beethoven.
3.Enhance students' cognitive competence by recognizing and identifying the four pictures.
4. Describe people who have made great achievements even if they have lost one of their senses.
七、教学过程设计
1、总体思路
本课的教学设计围绕培养提高听，说，读，看，讨论，辨认，评论，的综合技能与技巧能力展开，采用多媒体辅助教学，以此来创设良好的教学情境，优化教学过程，促进学生思考，采用教师指导，学生观察、体验、探索的方式，培养学生的观察力、分析力、想象力和自学能力,提高思维能力和运用英语的综合能力，激发创造能力。
2、教学过程。
《新课标》提出：根据高中生的认知特点和学习发展的需要，在进一步发展学生基本语言运用能力的同时，着重提高学生用英语获取信息、处理信息和分析、解决问题的能力，为他们进一步学习和发展创造必要的条件。依据教材内容的编排，我把本课的教学过程以下步骤来完成
The Analysis of Teaching Process
Before class, let students listen to a piece of music : Beethoven--献给爱丽丝 mp3
[设计说明]
本环节以上课听歌的形式让学生在音乐中激发学生听觉上的享受，为学生随后的问题做一个很自然的铺垫。
Step 1 - - - Organization
1.Exchange greetings with the Ss.
2.Duty report: It is between two students. They are having a dialogue.
[设计说明]
I think duty report is a long-term and essential part of daily teaching. It is a good opportunity for Ss to practice their listening and spoken English.
Step 2 - - - Leading in
Pair work: Work in pairs and discuss the following questions
1. Before class, you listened to a piece of music, do you know the name of it?
2.Who is the composer? if you know ,would you please give a brief introduction of him / her?
3.How did he/ she make great achievement even if he / she has lost one of his or her senses?
[设计说明] The two questions listed will excite students' interest about Beethoven ,a deaf world --renowned musician, and direct students to the topic of our five senses and make them to realize, as sound humans, the necessities to treasure our life and study hard .
Step 3 - - - Language focus
1.Ask students to listen to the tape about five senses on page1,and reply to the following questions :
1)How blind people can read ?
2) How do the deaf communicate with each other?
2.Encourage students to read the short passage and grasp the main idea of the text and try to guess the meaning of the new words in the context.
(New words :sense, affect, confuse)
(Main idea: introduction of five senses and relations between them)
[设计说明]This procedure can get students to gain a better understanding of the function of five senses and the close relatedness among them.
Step 4 - - - Observation
1)Make students to discuss the four pictures in the book within five minutes and answer the question mentioned in the book.
2)More pictures found in the Internet could be showed to students so as to test and improve their cognitive and identifying ability .
[设计说明]Through careful observation and heated discussion ,students will better know the importance of getting rid of the optical illusion in study ,thus cultivating their competence of sharp insight and keen observation.
Step 5 - - - Discussion
Have students to discuss the questions on the page 1 in groups and ask one representative to read out the answer they get.
Step6 - - - Homework
1. Get students to scan and skim the short passage on page94 individually and make a brief comment on the great musician Beethoven.
2.Ask student to read the essay three days to see from Helen Keller, a blind writer, feeling her strong eagerness to see the world from the bottom of her heart ,so as to inspire students to and make them to realize, as sound humans, the necessities to treasure our life and study hard .
[设计说明]Such assignment which gives an perfect echo with the beginning will broaden students' horizon and inspire them to realize, as sound humans, the necessities to treasure our life and study hard .
Blackboard design (板书设计)
Unit1 The world of our senses
The third period
Welcome to the unit
Useful words and expressions
sense affectconfuse
Sometimes senses affect one another
If you have good sense, they can still confuse us.
Blind people can read by touching letters in the raised dots called Braille.
People with hearing problems can understand each other using sign language.
Reflection after teaching（教学反思）
本节课我通过不同的任务设置，让学生在小组活动中通过合作和探究来完成各个任务，活动既有轻松有趣的音乐欣赏，又有需要深层思考的阅读理解活动和讨论活动，不同的任务设置激发了学生的学习兴趣和用英语表达的欲望，
由于学生的语言基础不扎实，在表达自己的看法和用英语进行讨论时，不时有学生夹杂着汉语，或有的学生不敢大胆说出自己的看法，欲言又止。这说明，在平时的教学中，我应该多呈现给学生更多的常用句型，让学生掌握常用句型，在让学生进行谈论前，应尽量帮助学生解决语言困难。在学生进行小组活动时，应尽量给学生更多的帮助，主动了解学生的语言困难。
篇15：牛津5B全册教案(译林牛津版七年级英语下册教案教学设计)
牛津5B：Unit 1
《牛津小学英语5B》Unit 1 A New Term
一、教学内容
《义务教育课程标准实验教科书 牛津小学英语》5B第一单元第一教时（Part B and Part C）
二、 教学目标
1、能正确地听、说、读、写单词
Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Chinese, Science,
Computer Studies.
2、能正确地理解并应用句型What day is it today ?It’s…
What lessons do you have in the … We have …
3、能用所学单词、句型问答并初步感知句型Welcome back to school. Nice to see you.
三、教学重点
正确应用所学的句型问答
四、教学难点
单词的四会掌握
五、教具准备
自制课表、录音、投影
六、教学过程
A. Free talk
1.Greetings
用“Happy New Year!’’ “Welcome back to school!” “How are you?’’等日常交际用语进行问答，复习并导入新知
2.Revision
复习“I like English .What do you like?’’ “Do you like…?’’ “How about you?’’等所学句型，渗透新知
3.Present “Science，Social Science, PE, Computer Studies’’
方法：延续以上对话引出。通过实物直观呈现，在学生理解的基础上，进行单词教学（教师先范读，让生静听、模仿跟读。可通过抢答、试拼等进行巩固）为避免单词教学的枯燥，可将单词放入句型中操练，也可为新句型的教学做个铺垫。
例如： I like Science. What subject do you like? Oh you like Art. Me,too. How about you/ And you? …
师生示范一例，生生操练并问答表演。
B. Presentation and practice
1.Learn “Monday”
教师自由谈话引出，例如：Oh, someone likes PE, but someone likes English…Today is “Monday”(出示自制课表)，师重复该单词，生静听、模仿跟读。延续以上对话，引出：“What lessons do we have today? ”
生听、模仿。
2.Present “What lessons do we have in the morning?”
引导学生用“We have┅”回答
1）师问，让学生熟练回答。
2）学生试问，师帮助纠正读音。
3）在会读的基础上操练并进行实际运用，师生先示范，后让学生自由练习运用。
3.Learn “Tuesday, Wednesday…Friday”
方法：渗透新句型“What day is it today? It’s…”
例如：What day is it today?
It’s Thursday.
为避免单词教法的重复，在新单词的引入时还可以用让学生试读的方法，单词的拼读可通过竞赛、游戏等方法以激发学生的兴趣。同时也可加入本课所学的句型“What lessons do we have in the morning?” “We have┅”，使对话的情景更为真实，也起到了复习的作用。
C． Practice
1)教师利用自制的课表进行连锁操练：
A：What day is it today?
B: It’s Thursday.
A: What lessons do you have in the morning?
B: We have┅
B: What day is it today?
C: It’s Friday.
….
2) 师利用投影进行有意义的操练，图文结合。
3）利用挂图，生生问答，检查表演。
D、Assign homework
1．朗诵并抄写要求会的单词、词汇和句型。
2．完成练习册A、B部分。
一、教学内容
《义务教育课程标准实验教科书 牛津小学英语》5B第一单元第二教时（Read and say 和part F）
二、教学目标
1、能正确地理解、掌握对话内容，并能朗读、初步表演对话。
2、能正确地听、说、读写单词a subject. Interesting, a week 和句型What subjects do you like ? I like…
3、能正确地运用对话中的日常交际用语Nice to see you. I hape we have more. How about you?
4、在掌握重点句型的基础上，通过本课学习培养学生的语言实际运用能力。
三、教学重点
能正确理解对话内容并能朗读和初步表演对话。
四、教学难点
能比较流畅的朗读对话，并能在掌握对话的基础上分角色表演。
五、教具准备
录音、图片、多媒体
六、教学过程
A．Revision
1．Play a game: “反口令”游戏
2．Free talk.
A: I have a … What do you have?
B:I have a …
A:I like going sopping. What do you like?
C:I like …
A:I often going shopping on Sundays. Is it Sunday today?
Ss:No,it isn’t. It’s Monday.
3.复习前一课所学有关的单词，通过图、词闪现，师生问答，或个别问答。
A: What day is it ?
B: It’s …
4. Sing a song 生初步感知、熟悉歌词及旋律。
B．Presentation
1．教学句型“What subjects do you like?” “I like…”
(由对话自然引出)T: We are having an Engilsh lesson. Do you like English?
Ss: Yes, …/No, …(师帮助学生回答)
T: What subjects do you like?(生跟读，出示板书)
S1:I like …(师作提示)
2．Teach: How about you?
师指明一名学生：How about you? 生自然地理解并作答，师可稍作提示“I like…”
3．Drill
a．师问生，直观呈观句型运用的情景，为学生自己开口说作铺垫。
b.同桌互问，要求学生适当加入问候语，真实运用语言。
c.走下坐位与学生交流，既检查学生的掌握情况，又给了学生说的场地、机会。
4.Learn “interesting”
1).教师可由以上的对话What subjects do you like? Do you like PE?生回答Yes, I do.师可引入Yes, it’s interesting.
新单词的呈现时师可放慢速度，让学生感知读音后再开口，为了使学生明确意思可在单词卡下面写出中文给学生参照。
2).Say a rhyme
根据不同的学生不同的爱好这一特点，由生描述I like …,It’s interesting .一方面训练 interesting,同时也复习前面所学各种科目的单词。师总结出rhyme.
English, English, A, B, C.
Maths, Maths, one, two, three.
Chinese, Chinese, write and read.
Art, Art, draw and sing.
PE, PE, run and swim.
C．Listen, read and say.
1．Present “I hope we have more ” “a week”
(师述引出)I like PE, do you like PE? Who like PE, please hands up. But we have only two in a week. I hope we have more.
单词week让学生多听几遍，读音可与 “need”比较读。也可提问：How many days are there in a week? 检查学生理解程度。在引入I hope we have more 后可改动课表, 如增加二节课，帮助学生理解。单词和句型的读应放在听清发音之后。
2．Listen and answer
课文对话分成两部分，降低难度，听一半对话后回答：
1).What day is it today?
2).What lessons do they have in the morning?
检查后继续听并完成句子：
What do Su Hai and Su Yang like? Su Hai likes and Su Yang likes .
3.Read the text by yourselves then together.
4．Read in roles
D. Practice
1．Look ask and answer
2．Do a survey
可借助F部分的表格，师先示范，让学生明确句型运用的场合，再相互问答。作记录后上前回答并介绍。
E．Homework
听录音，朗读并表演对话。
四人一组自编或改编对话。
一、教学内容
《义务教育课程标准实验教科书 牛津小学英语》5B第一单元第三教时（Part D, E, F and Part G, H）
二、教学目标
1．进一步掌握本单元的单词、句型达到能熟练运用的程度。
2．通过有针对性的操练，训练重点句型和难点，学生能用所学句型进行情景对话和交流。
3．了解元音字母O在开音节词中的读音。
4．能演唱本课英语歌曲。
三、教学重点
1．进一步掌握本单元的单词、句型达到能熟练运用的程度。
2、通过有针对性的操练，训练重点句型和难点，学生能用所学句型进行情景对话和交流。
四、教学难点
较熟练地掌握与运用所学句型及有关星期的单词。
五、教具准备
挂图、录音机、实物投影。
六、教学过程
A: Sing a song
1.Listen to the tape
听录音，投影歌词，学生熟悉旋律。试记歌词。
2．Sing after the tape
B: Free talk and revision
T：Good morning, class. Nice to see you.
Ss: Nice to see you.
T: I like running on Sunday morning. Do you like running?
S1:Yes, I do./ No, I don’t.
T: He likes PE, so he likes running.
What subject do you like?
S2: I like science.
T: How many science lessons do you have in a week?
S2: We have two. I hope we have more.
T: Excuse me .Do you have science today?
What day is it today?
Ss: It’s Friday.
T: What lesson do you have in the afternoon?
Ss:…
3.叫一学生走下坐位摹仿教师与其余学生交流。
4.利用挂图，操练句型 “What subject do you like ?”
I like … How about you?
I like …
先出示1幅图，师生试说后出示对话内容，其余挂图出示后生生操练再检查。
C: Look and read.
1.师引导学生读，扫除障碍，大致了解图意。
2.学习单词“trick” “minus”, 生猜其意并试读。
3.同桌问答，熟练地朗读对话。
4.你知道其中的窍门吗？用同样的方法来出题，自编对话。
例如：I like Maths very much. It’s┅
What’s 654 minus 456?
It’s ┅
D: Design a timetable
1.师出示自制的课表操练句型。
How many subject do you have this morning?
We have ┅
How many Chinese lessons do you have in a week?
We have ┅
What subject do you like?
I like┅
What lesson do you have on Wednesday?
We have┅
2. Make a new dialogue in pairs.
3. Action.
4. Design a timetable you like.
1).师示范（可利用科目粘贴的方式）：选择星期几，再边问边选科目粘贴。
2)小组合作，注意用英语问答。
3)上台演示并作介绍。
S1: Today is ┅
The first lesson is┅
T: Do you have any questions to ask?
S2:What subject do you like?
S1:I like ┅
S3:Do you ┅
E: Listen and repeat.
1.利用卡片呈现单词，可加入以前所学的单词认读，如，black,happy,hat,rabbit,after,class,basketball,dance,clock,coffee,doctor,hot┅
2.同桌交流，互读，体会读音相同和不同之处。
3.Read after the tape.
4.归纳出clock, coffee, doctor,hot的共同音标，后出示图，师生共同看图说话：The hot coffee near the clock is for the doctor.
F. Homework
1.抄写本单元所学单词、词组和句型，要求能默写。
2.能熟读并会表演Read and act .
3.自由分组编演小对话。
4.调查学生的兴趣、爱好，自制合理课表。
Unit2 A telephone call (第一教时)
一、教学目标：
1、能正确地听、说、读、写单词 a headache， bad ， a cough ，got， a fever ， a cold
2、能正确地听、说、读单词 a toothache ， an earache ， a backache ， a stomach ache
3、能正确地理解并运用句型 What’s wrong with you? I’ve got…
4、能初步熟悉歌谣。
二、教学重点及难点：
1、能正确地朗读和书写本课时要求掌握的单词。
2、能正确地理解和运用句型What’s wrong with you? I’ve got….
三、课前准备：
1、本课所教单词的图片。
2、录音机和磁带。
四、教学过程：
A、课前热身
Game: Touch your nose/eyes/head/ear/tooth并导入back stomach
B. Free talk
T: How are you?
S: Fine thank you. /Not so good
当有学生回答Not so good 时，教师关切地询问What’s the matter?
What’s wrong with you? 并用手势引导学生回答。
（What’s the matter? 在4A出现过教师可告诉学生What’s the matter?和What’s wrong with you?的意思一样.）
板书：What’s wrong with you? 生跟读
在生回答后,师：I’m sorry to hear that. I hope you get better soon.[板书，生跟读]
C. Presentation and practice.
1、Teach: toothache
a. 师与一生表演呈现
T: How are you?
S: Not so good.
T: What’s wrong with you?
S: I’ve got a toothache. (托腮作痛苦状)
T: I’m sorry to hear that. I hope you get better soon.
b. 师出示图片并配以单词 a toothache
生跟读：a toothache a toothache I’ve got a toothache.(板书：I’ve got a….)
c. 练习What’s wrong with you? I’ve got a…. I’m sorry to hear that. I hope you get better soon.
师问生答 生问生答
2、同法教学单词 earache backache headache stomachache
并启发学生总结此类单词的词尾特点：后缀-ache
3、 学单词fever cold cough
4、 听B部分录音并跟读
5、 Say a rhyme <
a.听录音，理解意思
b.听录音跟读
c.试着模仿改编，并朗诵.（替换high fever）
D操练句型及单词
1、 整体操练
师出示图片问：What’s wrong with you?
要求生根据图片内容边做相应的动作边回答：I’ve got a……
T: I’m sorry to hear that. I hope you get better soon.
2、学生两人一组自编对话并表演
3、P18 Work in pairs
a.Picture1 师生问答
b.Picture 2-6 学生两人一组看图进行模仿练习。然后分角色进行表演。
E Assign homework
1、并抄写要求四会掌握的单词和词组。
2、 运用所学的词组和句型自由交谈
Unit2 (第二教时)
一、教学目标：
1.能正确地听、说、读、写单词lunch , speak, feel
2.能初步理解并运用句型How do you feel now? I feel…..
3.能正确地听、说、读日常用语M ay I speak to…?This is …speaking .See you soon
4.能熟练诵读本课的歌谣。
二、教学重点和难点：
1．能正确朗读和书写本课的单词。
2．能熟练运用本课的句型。
三、课前准备：
1．本单元单词图片
2．两部玩具电话机
3．磁带 录音机
四、教学过程：
A. Revision
师生之间以free talk的形式复习句型What’s wrong with you?和本单元B部分的单词
T: Hello xxx How are you today?(出示图片 要求学生根据图片回答)
S: Not so good.
T: What’s wrong with you?
S: I’ve got a stomach ache
T: I’m sorry to hear that. I hope you get better soon.
S: Thank you.
2.生问师答 生问生答
B. Presentation and practice.
1. 师关切地询问刚才回答不舒服的学生：How do you feel now?
帮助学生回答I feel ill/ hot /tied…
T: I can get a glass of water for you
S: Thank you.
2、板书：How do you feel now?
I feel….
I can get a/some…for you.
生跟读数遍
3、看图编对话，练习并表演（教师逐一出示P7的图片）
C Read and say.
1、复习打电话（5A学过）并新授May I speak to …
May I speak to….
T: Hello, Is that Wang Bing?
S1: Yes, this is xxx
S2: No, this is Yu Wenjie.
T: Sorry, May I speak to Yang Jie?
帮助生答Hold on, please.并把电话递给Yang Jie
Yang Jie: Hello, this is Yang Jie speaking.
(板书speak May I speak to … This is …speaking)
2学生练习用May I speak to …打电话
3在此基础上，教师出示课文挂图并用语言直接导入：Helen is not at school She’s absent today She’s ill 引导学生理解absent的意思，然后指着挂图说 Helen is in her bedroom Su Yang is calling her.让学生理解第2句中her的意思
教师出示钟面，指针显示12：30 师：Su Yang calls her after lunch.帮助学生理解after lunch
4.听课文录音回答问题
What’s wrong with Helen?
a.听录音（P14）二遍
b.指名回答问题
c. Listen and repeat.
5.学习P15对话
a.师把钟面指针拨到4：35 问：What’s the time now?
S: It’s four thirty
T: Yes Classes are over. Su Yang calls Helen after school.
b. 看图听录音
c. 帮助学生理解still take any medicine
d. Listen and repeat.
6.教师安排学生整体听录音。模仿正确的语音语调学说对话。
7.情境表演，用玩具电话设置与课文内容相仿的情境。分角色表演本课会话内容。
D. Assign homework
1.听录音，朗读并表演对话
2.根据所学的对话内容自编或改编对话。
Unit 2 (第三教时)
一、 教学目标：
1.复习本单元所学的词汇
2.进一步掌握句型How do you feel now ? I feel … I can get a/some…for you . 及 What’s wrong with you ? I’ve got a…
3.能正确地听、说、读、写句子 How do you feel now ? I feel … What’s wrong with you ? I’ve got …
4.能听懂、会说、会读日常交际用语 Sorry， Wrong Number
二、教学重点及难点：
能正确地听、说、读、写句子 What’s wrong with you ? I’ve got a … How do you feel , now? I feel ……
三、课前准备：
1.B部分单词卡片
2.录音机和磁带
3.准备一些医生看病用的道具
4.两台玩具电话机
四、教学过程：
B、 A. Say a rhyme
1.用投影片出示英文儿歌《 I’m ill 》,让学生眼看录音机朗读
2.教师逐一出示单词卡片，让学生进行替换朗读。（复习单词）
C、 B. Ask and answer
1.Revesien
教师再次出示单词卡片，与学生进行问答。
T:×××，What’s wrong with you ?
S:（根据图片内容）I’ve got a …
T: I’m sorry to hear that ? How do you feel , now ?
S: I feel …
T: I can get a /some … for you .
2. Practise in groups.
a. 小组活动，让学生根据图片内容进行同桌自由问答，要求说得正确、流利。
b. 小组比赛。
D、 C. Read and act
1. 教师出示这部分内容的挂图。让学生听录音整体理解对话内容。并回答问题 What’s wrong with the woman ? 从而了解学生对对话的理解。
2. 学生跟读并朗读对话。
3. 在能熟练朗读对话的基础上，让学生两人一组扮演角色扮演对话。
E、 D. Work in pairs
1. 学生自由朗读这部分对话。
2. 教师指名朗读，检查学生掌握情况。
3. 模仿对话，让学生进行游戏。教师把学生分成四人小组，要求其中三人写出一个七位数的电话号码交给老师，并在号码旁注上自己的姓名。没有给出电话号码的学生要记住其中一位同学的电话号码，然后打电话给该同学。注意提示学生别人打错电话时可以说 Sorry ,wrong number .
F、 E. Assign homework
1. 朗读并抄写要求四会的单词，词汇和句型。
2. 用句型 What’s wrong with you ? I’ve got a … 和 How do you feel , now ? I feel … 进行笔头编对话各两组。
Unit 2 (第四课时)
一、教学目标：
1. 通过复习，要求学生能熟练地掌握本单元所学的有关疾病类词汇
2. 能熟练地在情景中运用本单元所学的句型和日常交际用语
3. 能进一步掌握句型 What’s wrong with you ? I’ve got … How do you feel now ? I feel …
4. 能初步了解字母O在闭音节单词中的读音
二、教学重点
能正确地听、说、读、写句型 What’s wrong with you ? 及其答语 I’ve got … 和 How do you feel , now ? 及其答语 I feel …
三、教学难点
能较熟练地掌握本单元所学的有关疾病类词汇
四、课前准备
1. 录音机和磁带，玩具电话机，医生用的一些道具，各种动物头饰
2. 单词图片
3.学生自制电话号码卡，放在桌上备用。
五、教学过程：
G、 A. Free talk and revision
1. 教师一边报出一生的电话号码，一边拨打电话，该生就拿起玩具电话机和老师进行对话。
T: 722××××, Hello , may I speak to ××× ?
S: This is ××× speaking .
T: Hi , ×××, This is Miss Huang , How are you , today ?
S: I’m fine , thank you . / Not so good .
（当生答Not so good 时）T: What’s wrong with you ?
S: I’ve got a …
T: Oh , I’m sorry to hear that .
How do you feel , now ?
S: I feel …
T: I can got a / some … for you .
S: Thank you .
T: Not at all , See you soon .
（教师也可故意报错号码，让学生练习用Sorry ,wrong number ）
2. 学生两人或三人一组模仿编对话并练习。
3. 小组比赛，看看哪一组表演得自然、流畅、正确。
H、 B. Say a rhyme
让学生跟着录音机诵读，并练习自编儿歌。
I、 C. Play a game
1. 教师创设情境：森林里有一家动物医院，里面有医术精湛的大象医生，老马医生，老虎医生和狮子医生。这两天，气温反常，许多小动物都生病了，都到医院去看医生，如果你是病人，该怎样去医院看医生呢 ？
2. 四位学生戴着大象，老马，老虎，狮子的头饰，身穿白大褂，手拿听诊器扮演医生，其他学生戴各种动物头饰扮演病人，到自己喜欢的医生处就诊。从而用 What’s wrong with you ? I’ve got a … Open your mouth and say “Ah” …等日常用语展开一段对话。
3. 教师巡视各组情况，进行及时表扬和纠正错误。
J、 D. Listen and repeat
1. 教师逐个出示单词 brother , love , monkey , mother . 让学生认读
2. 让学生在多次朗读单词后找出它们的共同因素。即O发 |∧|
3. 听录音跟读句子 My mother and my brother love that fat monkey .
K、 E. Assign homework
1. 抄写本单元所学的单词、词组和句型，并能默写。
2. 能够熟读并表演 Read and act 。
3. 根据实际生活情景自编对话，并表演对话。
Unit 3
一、教学内容
《牛津小学英语5B》 Unit 3 Hobbies（第一课时）
二、教学目标
1 能正确地理解、掌握对话内容，并能朗读、初步表演对话。
2 能正确地听、说、读、写单词：collect, a stamp, beautiful, a classmate, a ship, an animal。
3 能正确地运用对话中的词组和日常交际用语：take photos, Show us his stamps, please.
Here they are.
4 能正确地理解并运用句型Do you have any hobbies? Do you like…? Yes, I do.
No, I don’t. He/She likes…
5 能初步理解主语为第三人称单数时动词的变化形式。
6 初步熟悉歌曲：Hobbies。
三、教学重点
能正确理解对话内容并能朗读和初步表演对话。
四、教学难点
1 能比较流畅地朗读对话，并能在掌握对话的基础上分角色表演对话。
2 能初步理解主语为第三人称单数时动词的变化形式。
五、课前准备
1、一本有中国发行的船类和动物类邮票。
2、一架照相机。
3、Read and say 部分的投影片。
4、录音机和磁带。
六、教学过程
A Free talk
Eg: Good morning./How are you?/What day is it today?/What lessons do you have in the morning/afternoon?/What subject do you like? Do you like…?
B Presentation and practice
1 T:(出示一张印有花卉的邮票)What’s this? It’s a stamp.
Drill: stamp
T: Look at this stamp. What’s this?
Ss: It’s a flower.
T: Yes, it’s beautiful.
Drill: beautiful
2 T(出示一张印有船的邮票)Look. There’s a ship on the stamp. It’s a ship stamp.
Drill: ship
3 T:(出示几张印有动物的邮票)What’s this on the stamp?
Ss: There’s a dog on the stamp.
T: Yes, the dog is an animal. It’s an animal stamp.
(出示一张印有其他动物,如熊猫的照片，重复以上的对话)
T: They are animal stamps.
Drill: animal
4 T:(出示一本邮册)I like collecting stamps. Look, I have many stamps. They are beautiful. Do you like collecting stamps?
Ss: Yes, I do./No, I don’t.
Drill: collect/collect stamps.
5 T:(拿出一本相册)I like collecting photos.
(拿出照相机拍照)I like taking photos, too.
Drill: photo/take a photo.
Practise: The students say and do.(take a photo)
6 T:(请一男生和一女生到班前，教师指着女生对男生说)She’s your classmate.
（指全班学生）They are your classmates.
Drill: a classmate
7 Teaching of the sentence patterns.
1) T:(做游泳的动作)I like swimming. Do you like swimming?引导学生用Yes, I do./No, I don’t. I like…来回答。
2) 请一学生用I like…句型说出自己喜欢做的运动，教师逐一想全班:He/She likes…领说句型，学生跟读。
3) 教师出示Read and say部分的挂图进行句型介绍This is Yang Ling. She likes making clothes. Helen likes cooking and growing flowers.学生理解图片意思后模仿学说句型Yang Ling likes making clothes. Helen likes cooking and growing flowers.
4) 教师利用挂图进行问答练习，引出Does Yang Ling like making clothes? Yes, she does. Does Helen like taking photos? No, she doesn’t.领说句型。
C Read and say
1、 The students look at the picture and listen to the tape.
2、 The students listen to the tape and read after the tape.
3、 The students read the dialogue themselves and the teacher gives some help.
4、 The students read the dialogue in roles and act out the dialogue.
5、 Ask several groups of students to act out the dialogue.
D Listen to a song: Hobbies
E Assign homework
1 Listen to the tape, read the dialogue and act out the dialogue.
2 Make a new dialogue according to the dialogue of the text.
Unit 3 （第二教时）
一、 教学目标
1、 能正确地听、说、读、写单词a coin和词组take photos, go shopping.
2、 能正确地听、说、读词组make model ships, collect stamps, collect coins, grow flowers, keep goldfish, make clothes.
3、 能唱本课英文歌曲。
二、 教学重点
1、 能正确地听、说、读、写单词a coin和词组take photos, go shopping.
2、 能正确地听、说、读词组make model ships, collect stamps collect coins, grow flowers, keep goldfish, make clothes.
三、 教学难点
1、 能正确地听、说、读、写单词a coin 和词组take photos,go shopping.
2、 能熟练运用本课所学的词组。
四、 课前准备
1、 画有动作的多媒体课件
2、 B部分词组的动作图片和挂图
3、 录音机和磁带
五、 教学过程
A Free talk and motivation
1 Eg: Good morning!/How are you?/Nice to see you./Do you like…?Does he/she like…?
2 The students act out the dialogues.
3 Listen to the song: Hobbies, and sing after the song.
B Presentation
1 Present the pictures and say the phrases: take photos, make clothes, collect stamps.
2 T:(教师根据多媒体课件或动作图片提问)What’s he doing? He’s going shopping.通过教师自问自答引出make model ships, collect coins, keep goldfish，grow flowers等词组。
3 The students listen to the tape and read after the tape.
C Practice
1 把所有词组的图片贴在黑板上，教师说出一个词组并请一位学生指出黑板上相对的图片。
2 师生根据动作或图片进行问答练习，如Do you like going shopping?No,I don’t. Do you like keeping goldfish? Yes, I do.
3 教师引导学生看图，并用主语为第三人称单数的一般现在时叙述图片内容，如He likes making model ships. She likes making clothes.
4 学生同桌看图说话，自由操练词组。
D Consolidation
1 Listen and act or look and say.
（一学生发令，全班同学做动作，或一个学生演示一个动作，其他同学说出动作名称。）
2 Play the game: What’s missing?
（教师出示本单元所学的所有动词词组的图片，以最快的速度抽出一张，问学生What’s missing?学生说出被抽出图片的动词词组。）
3 Play the game: Chinese Whisper
（把学生分成小组，教师在每组第一位学生的耳边悄悄说出不同的单词或句子，让学生依次在下一位学生耳边轻声说出。然后请每组最后一位学生大声说出他/她所听到的单词或句子，说对的小组为优胜组。）
E Assign homework
1 read the phrases and copy the phrases.
2 Make some sentences with the phrases.
Unit 3 Hobbies（第三教时）
一、 教学目标
1、 能熟练掌握本单元所学的有关兴趣爱好词汇。
2、 能熟练掌握句型Do you have any hobbies?及其答语Yes,I do.
3、 能用句型I like…和He/She likes…,too.描述自己或他人的爱好和活动。
4、 能用所学句型进行情景会话和交流。
二、 教学重点
能正确地听、说、读、写句子Do you have any hobbies?及其答语Yes,I do.和I like…及He/She likes …,too.等句型。
三、 教学难点
能正确运用Do you have any hobbies?及其答语Yes,I do.并能在具体情景中以口笔头或书面的形式进行交流。
四、 课前准备
1、 有关活动方面的多媒体课件或图片
2、 录音机和磁带
3、 学生自带一些有关自己兴趣爱好或活动的照片。
五、 教学过程
A Sing a song
The students sing after the tape.
B Revision
1 Present the pictures of Part B with the CAI, the students say the eight phrases.
2 The teacher present the picture of Part B, the students talk about their hobbies with the sentence pattern: I like…..
3 Play a game
教师课前准备一些动作图片，一学生到讲台前挑选一种喜欢的动作图片，做图片上动作，其他学生猜他或她喜欢的活动：He/She likes …
C Ask and answer
1 Revision
Present the CAI and talk with the students.
Eg: S1: Do you have any hobbies?
T: Yes, I do. I like collecting stamps.
2 Practise in groups
1) Work in groups.
Eg: S1: Do you have any hobbies?
S2: Yes, I do. I like collecting/…
2) Compete in groups.
The students make sentences: Do you have any hobbies? Yes, I do. I like…He/She likes…,too.(The group which makes the most sentences is the winner.)
3) Make an interview.
The student interview his classmates with the topic: Hobbies.
Eg:S1: Do you have any hobbies?
S2:Yes, I do. I like making model ships/…
S1:(Point to another student) He likes making model ships, too. Right?
S2: Yes, he does./ No, he doesn’t. He likes taking photos/…
D Look,read and complete
1 The teacher present the pictures of PartD: This is a picture of Su Hai’s family. Su Hai and her family have some hobbies. The talk about the picture with the students, make the students know the meaning of the picture.
2 The students do the exercise.
3 Check the answer.
F Assign homework
1 Read and copy the words and sentences.
2 Make out a new dialogue.
Unit3 Hobbies（第四课时）
一、 教学目标
1、 通过复习，要求学生能熟练地掌握本单元所学的有关活动类词汇。
2、 能熟练地在情景中运用本单元所学的句型和日常交际用语。
3、 能进一步掌握句型Do you have any hobbies?及其答语Yes,I do.并能用I like…和He/She likes…,too.句型描述自己或他人喜欢的爱好和多动。
4、 能初步了解字母u在单词中的读音。
二、 教学重点
能正确地听、说、读、写句型Do you have any hobbies?及其答语Yes,I do.和I like…及He/She likes…,too.句式。
三、 教学难点
能熟练地掌握本单元所学的有关活动类词汇。
四、 课前准备
1、 有关活动的多媒体课件或图片
2、 E部分的教学挂图
3、 录音机和磁带。
4、 调查表
五、 教学过程
A Free talk and revision
Eg: Good morning, class./I like…Do you have any hobbies?/He/She likes …Right?
B Sing a song
The students sing after the tape.
C Do a survey
1 Present the CAI or the picture of Part B, the students say the phrases.
2 Free talk.
The students talk about hobbies with each other.
3 Do a survey.
1) The teacher do a survey as a model.
Eg: T(Present the form)Do you have any hobbies?
S1:Yes,I do. I like…
T:(Fill the form)
2)The students do the survey in groups.
4 Sum up.
教师课前做一张统计表,抽取若干组学生，让学生汇报调查情况。
Eg: T: Can you tell me about your survey?
S: Yes. Five student like taking photos. One student likes making model ships.
taking photos 5
making model ships 1
D Read and act
1 T:(Present the picture) Now ,Boys and girls. Look at the picture. What does Liu Tao like? Can you guess?
Ss:…
(The student listen to the tape.)
2 Teach the words: water, every, aunt, carefully with the picture. Learn the dialogue.
3 Answer the questions:(Make sure the students understand the dialogue)
Eg:1)What is Liu Tao doing?
2)Who likes growing flowers, too?
3)Does Liu Tao water the trees and flowers every day?
4 Read the dialogue after the tape and act out the dialogue.
E Listen and repeat.
1 Play a game:
教师用多媒体课件快速展示图片，一闪即停，然后问学生：What’s missing?让学生看图后猜单词。
2 The students read the words together.
3 Sum up the common pronunciation.
4 Present the phonetic symbol and read after the teacher.
5 Read the sentence.
F Assign homework
1 Read the dialogue of Part E and try to act out it.
2 Make a new dialogue.
3 Do the exercise of the Exercise Book.
Unit 4《牛津小学英语5B》第四单元教案
课题： Unit 4 An English friend
课时： 本单元共4课时 本课为第1课时
课时目标：1. Four skills: fast high ,Does he/she…? Yes, he does. No, he doesn’t.
2. Three skills: speak loudly, run fast, jump high, dance beautifully, walk carefully, sit quietly
3. Require the Ss to use v. and adv. properly in a certain situation
教学内容和过程：
A. Warming up
1. Sing a song.
2. Free talk
B. Preparation
1. Greetings
2. Sing a song “Come on and join into the games”
C. Presentation and practice
1. jump high
a. Now, let’s do some exercise. Sun rise. Wave your arms. Shake your body. Stand up. Jump high etc. Run fast.
b. Ask a student to jump high. (put “jump high” on the Bb)
c. Read in pairs.
2. run fast
a. Let’s act! Run fast! (Put “run fast” on the Bb.)
b. Read in pairs!
3. speak loudly
a. I say you do. fast→run loudly→speak
b. Put “speak loudly” on the Bb. and read loudly.
c. You say s. do. cry loudly sing loudly
4. Teach dance beautifully, walk carefully, sit quietly in the same way
5. Listen to the tape and read after the tape
6. Hand out the cards to some students, ask the others to guess.
7. Show Ss some photos and talk about them. Does he run fast? Yes, he does. No, he doesn’t .Ask Ss try to say “Does he …?”
8. Talk about the picture in pair.
9. Make a dialogue and act it.
D. Consolidation
Do a survey
《牛津小学英语5B》第四单元教案
课题： Unit 4 An English friend
课时： 本单元共4课时 本课为第2课时
课时目标：1. Four skills: an e-mail, busy, town, age, usually, what does she usually do? He/she usually…
2. Three skills: I’m busy, we’re the same age
3. Require the students to read and act the dialogue
教学内容和过程：
A. Free talk
B. Preparation
3. Do some exercise!
4. Talk about the photos.
C. Presentation and practice
1. What does he/she usually…? He/she usually…
a. What do you usually do? I usually play football. What does he usually do? He usually…
b. Reading and practice.
2. Look at the picture and talk about it.
c. E-mail, surf the Internet, busy
What’s Wang Bing doing? Is he surfing the Internet? He’s busy.
d. town, age
Do you live in the city? No, I’m in a small town. Are you twelve? Yes, I am. And you? I’m twelve, too. You’re in the same age.
3. Listen to the tape, answer the question.
d. Does Wang Bing’s friend live in London?
e. How old is his friend?
f. Does he usually play football?
g. Does he play well?
4. Imitate!
5. Practice in groups.
D. Consolidation
6. Act the dialogue.
7. Talk about your own friends.
《牛津小学英语5B》第四单元教案
课题： Unit 4 An English friend
课时： 本单元共4课时 本课为第3课时
课时目标：1.进一步掌握本单元所学的动词词组
2.进一步掌握句型“What does…usually do…?” “He/She usually…”
能用该句型询问他人日常生活规律
3.通过本课学习能灵活区别运用Do…? Yes,…do./No,…don’t．
Does…? Yes,…does./No,…doesn’t．
教学用具：图片 录音机 投影
教学内容和过程：
A. Say a rhyme
3. Try to read. (投影呈现)
4. Listen to the tape.
5. Let’s say together.
B. Revision
5. 图片闪现，生说本单元所学的词组
6. Introduction
T: I usually read English books and watch TV on Sundays.
My brother usually does his homework…
My parents usually…
7. Do a survey in group
S1: What do you usually…?
S2: I usually…
S1: What do…
S3: I…
8. 从他人口中了解你的同学
e.g. SA: Excuse me ,B What does C usually do…
SB: She usually…
SA: Does D…?
SB: Yes,…/No,…
9. Play a game
a. 游戏目的：复习What does…? Does…?
b. 游戏准备：师准备各类图片
c. 方法：看看，问问，猜猜
一生看图，师生共猜（个别：Does…）
C. Ask and answer
8. 出示图片，师生示范一例
9. 同桌问答
10. 扩充对话，比比哪组说得好
D. Look and read
11. Look at the pictures
12. Listen to the tape, then repeat
13. Try to say (If you are the boy)
14. Describe
Use: He goes to school…
He has…
He likes…
15. 师提供类似的图片，出示关键词，生试说（同桌），比比谁说得既流利又正确。
E. Assign homework
1. 回顾本单元所学的词组，单词，试默
2. 用所学的句型描述你同学的日常生活，兴趣爱好
提示：go to school at seven
have six lessons everyday
have lunch at 11:10
like singing
…
《牛津小学英语5B》第四单元教案
课题： Unit 4 An English friend
课时： 本单元共4课时 本课为第4课时
课时目标：1. 通过复习，要求学生能熟练地掌握本单元所学的动词词组
2. 能熟练地在情景中运用本单元所学的句型及日常交际用语
3. 能进一步掌握句型Does…? Yes,…does./No,…doesnt．并能用What does …usually do…?询问他人日常生活规律
4．能初步了解字母u在单词中的读音
教学内容和过程：
A. Free talk and revision
T: I usually go shopping on Saturdays and Sundays.
Do you usually…?
S1: Yes, I do. / No, I don’t.
I usually play chess on Saturdays.
T: Does your mother work on Saturdays and Sundays?
S1: Yes, she does.
T: What does your father usually do in the evening?
S1: He usually watches TV and reads newspapers.
…
B. Say the rhymes
一生起说，齐说
C. Play a game
游戏目的：复习所学的动词词组并进行扩展，灵活运用
游戏方法：师说一副词，生做各种动作
e.g. cry /laugh/sing
You’re right. /great!
做错的：You’re wrong.
I’m sorry.
D. Read and act.
3. Look at the pictures, read after the tape in roles.
4. Change.
5. Try to ask and answer (Don’t look at your books.)
鼓励学生说，不一定要全面，完整，说一两句也行，还可以用自己的话说。
E. Listen and repeat
6. T writes some words on the blackboard or use some cards with the words.
7. Read together or ask someone to read.
3. 将单元按读音归类
[ju:] [u] [A]
4. Look at the picture, describe it then say “The puppet jumps and runs in the bus”
e.g. T: What’s this?
Ss: It’s a puppet.
T: Where is it?
Is it in the box?
Is it in the box?
Ss:…
F. Assign homework
1. 能熟练表演本课对话
2. 模仿Part A并结合重点句型自编对话（分小组进行）
Try to write a small passage (About your family member or your classmate)
Unit 5 Review and check
课时： 本单元共3课时 本课为第1课时
一.教学目标及重难点.
1. 复习及巩固动词与副词的搭配.
2. 复习问句:Does he/she…？yes, he /she does. No, he/she doesn’t.
二.教具准备:挂图，图片。
三.教学内容及过程.
Step 1.Revision
1. Greetings
2. Freetalk
1).Do you have any hobbies?
2).Do you like…？
3).Does he/she…？
4).What does he/she usually do…？
3. Answer quickly
The way: 当一个学生说出动词时,另一个学生快速的说出相应的副词.
Step 2.Look,read and write.
1. Show the pictures (1-4) and answer questions.
1).What does the girl/boy do?
2)do he/she…？
2. Read the sentences and fill in the blank.
3. Check the answers.
4. Show the pictures (5-8) and answer questions.
1).Does Miss Li like keeping goldfish?
2).Does Mr Black like making model ships?
3).Does Mrs Brown like cooking?
4).Does Mr Green like collecting stamps?
Step 3.Look and write.
1. Show the pictures of Part B.
2. Talk about the pictures.
3. Divide 8 groups and make dialogues
4. Check out.
Step 4 Consolidation
Assign homework: Finish Part A and B.
Read it and recite it.
课题： Unit 5 Review and check
课时： 本单元共3课时 本课为第2课时
一．教学目标
1． 能熟练运用“打电话”及课程的日常用语
2． 能正确掌握like + doing的形式
二． 教学重难点
目标1，2
三． 教学用具
挂图，实物，图片
四． 教学过程
Step1.Revision
1.Greetings
2.Free talk
May I speak to…?
This is …speaking.
I am sorry to hear that.
See you soon..
Sorry, wrong number.
Step 2.Look read and complete of part C
1. Show the picture and describe the dialogue
2. Make a dialogue in pairs
3. Check out
4. Play a game: Make friends
The way:做两组卡片：一组是课程名称，另一组是代表该课程的图片。
请几位学生各抽一张，并找出与自己卡片上的名称/图片相符的图片/
名称，引导学生复习课程名称，如一位学生出示代表PE的科目图片，
另一位学生则说PE。
5. Show the picture of part C2
6. Make a dialogue in pairs
7. Check out
Step 3.Consolidation
1. Assign homework: finish part C
2. Recite it
课题： Unit 5 Review and check
课时： 本单元共3课时 本课为第3课时
教学目标
1． 通过复习，能熟练地掌握1-4单元所学的单词。
2． 能教熟练地在情景中运用1-4单元所学的句型和日常交际用语。
二． 教学重点
1． 能熟练地掌握1-4单元所学单词
2． 能综合运用1-4单元所学的句型和日常交际用语。
3． 能初步改编或扩充1-4单元所学的对话。
三． 教学难点
培养学生综合运用语言的能力。
四． 教学准备
挂图，图片
五．教学过程：
Step1. Revision
1. Greetings
2. Warming-up
3. Free talk
1) Do you have any hobbies?
2) What do you like?
I like…
3) What do you usually do?
4) What does he/she usually do?
He/she usually…
Step 2.Look and talk
1. Game “Do and Guess”
The way: 根据动作猜词组 给名词快速说词组
2. Show the picture of part D
1) 指导学生观察图片。
2)
3. According the model to make a new dialogue
4. Check out
Step 3.Consolidation
Assign homework: Make a new dialogue and write it down.
5B. Unit 6 A部分 Read and Say
二、教学目标：
1. 四会掌握人体部位：arm , hand, foot , leg.
2. 熟练运用日常交际用语：Touch…with…
三、教学重、难点：
1. 熟练运用交际用语。
2. 灵活熟练运用日常交际用语。
四、课前准备：
1． 准备录音机和本课会话的磁带。
2． 准备本课会话的投影片。
3． 课前写好本课的课题5B. Unit 6 A部分 Read and Say
五、教学过程：
A Organization组织教学
1. Greetings
T: Good morning, boys and girls.
Ss: Good morning, Miss Zhang.
2. Let’s sing a song 学生听录音跟唱英语歌曲What are you doing?
B Revision复习
1. Let’s speak English
T: What’s your name? Ss: My name is…
T: What are you doing? Ss: I’m reading…
T: Are you playing basketball? Ss: Yes, I am.
T: Does he play well? Ss: Yes, he does.
T: Does Mr. Black like making model ships? Ss: Yes, he does.
T: Does Mrs. Brown like cooking? Ss: Yes, she does.
2. Let’s act.
(1)T:创设情境，学生表演（T示范一组，运用祈使句）
T: Stand up. Jump, please… Touch your nose…
(2)学生模仿做。
C Presentation.新授
1. T又发命令作动作→人体部位名称。
2. T投影图片，由旧引新（T注音标，请学生试拼读）
3. arm, hand, leg, foot
4. 学生集体升降调朗读。
5. T指投影：T: Touch your nose with your hand.
学生理解后，T板书。
6. 学生集体朗读。
D Practice练习
1. T指投影图片，请同学快速说出人体部位。
2. 男女竞赛，争说人体部位。
3. 在熟练具体部位名称后，运用句型练习。
4. T发命令，学生作动作，练习数组。
T: Touch your foot with your hands.
5. 学生模仿教师，互相发命令。
6. Talk in pairs. 同桌发命令。
E Consolidations:
1. 请学生个别发命令，作动作。
2. T投影图片，请同学看图，填空，写出相应的单词。
3. 听录音，跟读B部分。
4. 总结：
(1) 要求同学们熟练运用日常交际用语：Touch…with…
(2)四会掌握人体部位。
六、布置作业：
1. 抄写四会单词各一行。
2. 跟读本课会话录音二十分钟。
七、板书设计：
Unit 6
arm hand leg foot
Touch…with…
The Second Period (第二课时)
一．教学内容：
5B.Unit 6 B 部分 Look, read and learn.
1. 四会单词：
time, left, right, stop, touch.
2. 四会句型：
Put…on…
Touch…with…
All right.
3. 日常交际用语：
Stand in a line.
Let’s do some exercises.
Now, listen carefully.
Jump up and down.
Do this…times…
Now, stand up, everybody!
二、教学目标：
1. 正确掌握四会单词。
2． 能正确掌握四会句型。
3． 熟练运用日常交际用语。
三、教学重、难点：
1. 正确掌握四会单词、句型。
2． 熟练运用日常交际用语。
3． 综合灵活熟练运用日常交际用语。
四. 课前准备：
1．准备录音机和本课会话的磁带。
2．准备人体各个部位的图片，准备贴在黑板上。
3．准备人体各个部位的单词卡片。
4．准备人体部位的投影片。
5．课前写好本课的课题5B.Unit 6 B 部分 Look, read and learn.
五、教学过程：
A Organization 组织教学
1．Greetings
T: Good morning/afternoon, boys and girls.
Ss: Good morning/afternoon, Miss Zhang.
2.Let’s sing a song.学生听录音跟读唱英语歌曲 We can dance!
B Revision 复习
1. Let’s speak English.
T: Who’s on duty today? Ss: am.
T: Is everyone here today? Ss: Yes, we are all here.
T: What do you like? Ss: I like…
T: Do you like bananas? Ss: Yes I do.
T: What day is it today? Ss: It’s…
T: What lessons do you have in the morning? Ss: We have…
T: What subject do you like? Ss: I like…
2.Let’s act:请两组同学站起来表演
(1)T:创设情境，学生表演（T示范一组，运用祈使句）
T: Put…on…, please… Touch your eyes…
(2)学生模仿做。
C Presentation 新授
1. T投影图片：at a PE lesson 创建情境，让学生理解 ，在一节体育课上。
T板书，学生集体朗读。
2. T创设两个情境：让学生理解。
(1)Stand in a line , please.
Put your feet together.
Jump up and down ten times.
(2)Put your hands on your head and turn left and right.
Do this ten times
D Practice 练习
1．T板书以上情境句型→四会单词 T注音，学生集体朗读。
2．学生集体朗读四会句型。
3．T发命令学生作动作。
4．Talk in pairs. 同桌互相发命令。
5．同桌互相发命令。
E Consolidations
1.男女生互相发命令
2.看投影，学生模仿录音跟读前两段
3.总结：
(1)要求四会掌握的单词：arm ,hand ,foot, leg.
(2)要求四会掌握的句型：Put…on…
Touch…with…
All right.
六、布置作业：
1．抄写句型、单词各三遍。
2．跟读本课B部分录音二十分钟。
七、板书设计：
Unit 6
time left right stop touch
Put…on… Touch…with…. All right.
5B.Unit 6 C 部分Work in pairs.
1. 四会单词：
time, left, right, stop, touch.
2. 四会句型：
Put…on…
Touch…with…
All right.
3. 日常交际用语：
Stand in a line.
Let’s do some exercises.
Now, listen carefully.
Jump up and down.
Do this…times…
Now, stand up, everybody!
二、教学目标：
掌握句型： Touch…with… All right.
三、教学重、难点：
1. 熟练运用日常交际用语。
2. 综合熟练运用日常交际用语。
四、课前准备：
1． 准备录音机和本课的磁带。
2． 准备C部分的投影片。
3． 准备本课的单词卡片。
4． 课前写好本课的课题5B.Unit6 C部分Work in pairs.
五、教学过程：
A Organizations.组织教学
1. Greetings
T: Good morning/afternoon, boys and girls.
Ss: Good morning/afternoon ,Miss Zhang.
2．Let’s sing a song.学生听录音跟读唱英语歌曲 We can dance!
B Revisions复习
1. Let’s speak English.
T: Who’s on duty today? Ss: I am.
T: Is everyone here today? Ss :Yes ,we are all here.
T: What do you like? Ss I like…
T: Do you like bananas? Ss: Yes, I do.
T: What day is it today? Ss: It’s…
T: What lessons do you have in the morning?
Ss: We have…
T: What subject do you like? Ss: I like…
2. Let’s act:请两组同学站起来表演
(1)T:创设情境，学生表演（T示范一组，运用祈使句）
T: Put…on…, please… Touch your eyes…
(2)学生模仿做。
C Presentation新授
1. 投影图片：at a PE lesson T发命令，请同学作动作。
2. 再投影另外两个情境的图片。
（1）Lie on your back. Put your knees together.
Bend your knees. Move your legs to the left, then move to the right.
（2）lift up your left leg and touch it with your right hand.
2.学生理解后，集体朗读后。
D Practice 练习
1. 发命令学生作动作，理解明白后集体朗读。
2. 个别领读。
3. Talk in pairs.
4. 学生发命令作动作。
E Consolidation
1. T投影后，整节PE课，让学生试听录音。
2. 看图片，请学生跟读录音。
3. 请学生分片段表演。
4. 总结：要求学生熟练运用日常交际用语。
六、布置作业：
1. 听录音跟读二十分钟。
2. 抄写C部分的句型两遍（两英两中）。
七、板书设计：
Unit 6
Touch…with…
All right.
The Fourth Period（第四课时）
一、教学内容：
5B.Unit 6 D 部分Look ,read and complete.
1. 掌握四会词汇：Touch…with…
2. 学习人体部分名称。
二、教学目标：
1. 正确掌握人体部位名称。
2. 熟练运用四会句型。
三、教学重、难点：
1. 正确掌握四会单词、句型。
2． 熟练运用日常交际用语。
3． 综合灵活熟练运用日常交际用语。
4． 熟练运用四会句型。
四、课前准备：
1． 准备录音机和本课的磁带。
2． 准备D部分的投影片。
3． 准备本课的单词卡片。
4． 课前写好本课的课题5B.Unit6D部分Look, read and complete.
五、教学过程
A Organization组织教学
1. Greetings
T: Good morning/afternoon, boys and girls.
Ss: Good morning/afternoon, Miss Zhang.
2．Let’s sing a song.学生听录音跟读唱英语歌曲 Two jackets.
B Revision 复习
1．Let’s speak English.
T: Who’s on duty today? Ss: I am.
T: Is everyone here today? Ss: Yes, we are all here.
T: What do you like? Ss: I like…
T: Do you like bananas? Ss: Yes, I do.
T: What day is it today? Ss: It’s…
T: What lessons do you have in the morning? Ss: We have…
T: What subject do you like? Ss: I like…
2．T投影人体图片，请学生说出部分名称
3．请学生听写四会单词
4．T创设PE课的情景，请学生分片段表演
C Practice练习
1 . 由表演→句型操练Touch…with… three times
T板书，学生集体朗读
2．投影C部分图片，学生模仿说句子
3．Talk in pairs.
4．看图写句子
E Consolidation
1. Play games Chinese Whisper
传句子：Touch your head with your hand.
2.同学之间发命令作动作。
3. 总结：要求同学门熟练运用四会句型，以及日常交际用语。
六布置作业：
1．看图写句子。
2．听二十分录音并跟读。
七、板书设计：
Unit 6 At a PE lesson
Touch…with…three time
The fifth period（第五课时）
一、教学内容：
5B.Unit 6 E,F,G,H 部分.
1． 复习人体部位名称，以及体育课上的动作词组， D.E部分
2． 复习祈使句
3． 复习现在进行时
二、教学目标：
1． 正确掌握单词，词组
2． 熟练运用祈使句
3． 综合灵活运现在进行时
三、教学重、难点：
1． 正确掌握祈使句和现在进行时。
2． 祈使句语现在进行时再正确情况下使用
四、课前准备：
1． 准备录音机和本课唱歌的磁带。
2． 准备E,F,G,H的图片。
3． 课前写好本课的课题5B.Unit6.E,F,G,H部分。
五、教学过程：
A Organizations.组织教学
1. Greetings
T: Good morning/afternoon, boys and girls.
Ss: Good morning/afternoon, Miss Zhang.
2. Let’s sing a song.学生听录音跟读唱英语歌曲 Two jackets.
B Revision复习
1. Let’s speak English.
T: Who’s on duty today? Ss: I am.
T: What day is it today? Ss: It’s Monday.
T: What subject do you like? Ss: I like…
T: What class are you in? Ss: I’m in Class Two.
T: What lessons do you have on Monday? Ss: We have…
2. T投影人体图片，请学生快速说出人体部位名称
3．请同学板演默写人体部位名称单词
4．T投影PE课，请同学看情景说句子。
C Practice练习
1. 请同学看情景，表演PE课内容
2. T发命令请学生作动作
3. T投影图片：D部分图片，让学生说句子作动作
4.请另外一学生运用现在进行时说出他们所做的动作
5.反复练习D部分，四幅图
6.请学生笔头完成
7.T投影E部分，请同学看图朗读；分讨论表演
六、布置作业：
1． 听录音跟读本课所内容，要求学生能够根据本课所学句子和日常交际用语进行自编会话，同桌表演。
七、板书设计：
Unit 6 At a PE lesson
D部分句型
The Sixth Period(第六课时)
一、教学内容：
第六课时是综合练习课，完成本单元学习手册。
1. F部分，活动内容。
2. 语音。
3. Sing a song.（Do some exercise with me）
二、教学目标：
1. 能听懂人体部位名称并画出。
2. 能正确听读、辨认语音。
3. 学英歌曲。
三、教学重、难点：
1.正确掌握字母组合ai、ay在单词中的发音，即[ei]
2. Listen and draw.能听懂并画出。
3 学合唱英语歌曲。
四、课前准备：
1.准备本词汇的图片。
2.准备录音机和练习册听力部分的录音。
3.黑板上预先写好课题Unit2 A telephone call.
五、教学过程：
A Say a rhyme 学生集体说歌谣，并自己配上动作。
B Free talk 师生交流。
C Revision复习
1. Let’s speak English.
T: Who’s on duty today? Ss :I am.
T: What day is it today? Ss: It’s Monday.
T: How do you feel now? Ss: I feel…
T: What’s wrong with you? Ss: I have got a fever.
2. Let’s act.
T投影PE课情景，请同学表演。
D Listen and repeat.
(1)T投影，语音. 请学生认真听然后跟读。
(2)学生集体朗读。
(3)请个别学生朗读。
E 1.T投影人体部位，请学生认人体部位名称词。
2. Listen and draw
请学生静听然后画画。
3.同桌之间互相Listen and draw
F 学唱英语歌曲。
1.先静听录音两遍，跟唱。
2.学生表演唱。
3. 总结：要求学生能听懂教师所发的命令，并能做动作。
六、布置作业：
1. 跟读录音20分钟。
2. 全面复习本单元的四会内容。
七、板书设计
Unit 6 At a PE lesson
waiter waitress day play
八、教后笔记：
通过直观教具，生动形象的动作对学生进行句型的教学，教学效果很好。人体部位名称的学习采用实物教学，学生很有兴趣。祈使句的学习采用游戏的形式对学生进行教学，让学生在玩中学到知识，由初步的感性认识再逐步上升到理性认识，最后落实到笔头，课堂教学效果很好。
Unit 7 The First Period（第一课时）
一、教学内容：
5B Unit7A部分 Read and Say
二、教学目标：
1. 能正确理解、掌握A部分会话，并能朗读、初步表演对话。
2. 能正确地运用对话中出现的日常交际用语。
3. 初步掌握会话中出现的四会单词night, half, past, a face, ready, on duty, quick, a game, a quarter, really
三、教学重、难点：
能正确理解、掌握A部分会话。
四、课前准备：
1. 准备录音机和磁带。
2. 准备投影片（早上、中午和晚上三个场景）。
3. 准备本课会话中出现的有关词汇的图片。
4. 课前在黑板上写好课题。
五、教学过程：
A Sing a song. 跟录音机边听边表演唱英文歌曲Do some exercise with me
B Free talk. 师生交流
T: Good morning, boys and girls.
Ss: Good morning.
T: Glad to see you.
Ss: Glad to see you, too.
T: Let’s play a game, OK？
Ss: OK!
C Revision.复习
1. 组织学生做“听词组、做动作”和“做动作、说词组”游戏，复习动词词组get up, have breakfast, watch TV, do homework等。
2. 在熟练掌握这些动词词组后，教师演示wash my face和brush my teeth这两个词组，让学生学习。
D Presentation and drill新授和操练
1. 教师利用教具钟以What’s the time? It’s….句型引导学生学习含有past和to的表示时间的词组。
T: (教师事先将钟拨到6:30) What’s the time?
S1: It’s six thirty.
T: Yes, it’s half past six. (教师将钟拨到6:50)What’s the time?
S2: It’s six fifty.
T: Yes, it’s ten to seven. (将钟拨到6:45) What’s the time?
S3.: It’s six forty-five.
T: Yes, it’s a quarter to seven.
2. 在学生已掌握时间表达法的基础上，教师将教具钟拨到相应的点钟并说It’s half past six. It’s time to get up.再将钟拨到6:45,问学生What time is it?引导学生回答It’s a quarter to seven.后，教师说Yes, it’s time for breakfast. Let’s have breakfast.引出What time is it? It’s time for….句型。教师示范发音，学生静听、模仿、跟读。
3. 借助挂图，解释情境，教师说It’s Thursday today. David has a lot of things to do. He’s busy. He has no rest.边摆手边装着休息状,引出单词rest。
4. 出示本部分三个场景的挂图，逐步呈现对话，让学生看图听录音，整体了解会话内容。引出、学习本部分单词、词组以及相关句型。
5. 听录音，学生模仿、跟读会话。
E Practice and consolidation练习和巩固
1. 学生小组内分角色朗读会话。
2. 学生小组汇报朗读会话。
3. 小组推荐组员到台前用所学语言描述图片内容。
4. 学生小组内看图说话。
六、布置作业：
听录音跟读本课会话，小组进行会话，准备下节课表演会话。
The Second Period(第二课时)
一、教学内容：
5B. Unit 7 B部分 Look, read and learn
二、教学目标：
一、 进一步掌握句型What time is it? It’s….
一、 能正确地掌握含有past和to的时间表达法。
三、教学重、难点：
能正确地掌握含有past和to的时间表达法。
四、课前准备：
1、 准备画有各种不同时间钟面的投影片
2、 请各小组带一个钟。
3、 在黑板上预先写好课题Unit7 After school。
五、教学过程：
A Listen to a rhyme 听本课的歌谣两遍，边听边用手打节奏。
B Free talk 师生交流
C Revision 复习
1. 出示A部分会话投影片，看图进行师生会话。
2. 学生看图进行小组会话。
一、 学生小组会话表演。
一、 Play a game : Bingo!来复习数词。
D Presentation and drill 新授和操练
1. 出示一教具钟，教师口述What time is it? It’s….分别引出含有past和to的表示时间的词组。
2. 引导学生观察含有past和to的表示时间的词组，体会、发现past和to的用法。
3. 学生小组内练说含有past和to的表示时间的词组，使学生尽快掌握此类时间表达法。
4. 出示几点一/三刻的钟面，师生问答What time is it? It’s a quarter past/to… .引出单词quarter，强调单词中字母组合ar的发音，教师示范发音，学生静听、模仿、跟读、拼读。
5. 游戏活动：听听、指指。
教师拿出事先准备好画有各种不同时间钟面的投影片，如6：30，6：35，
6：05，教师发令，学生听音并指出正确图片。待学生比较熟练后，再请一些小助手到台前发令。
E Practice and consolidation练习和巩固
1. 游戏：抢答比赛。
以每个小组为单位进行操练，任意一成员拨一时间问What time is it?其余学生拍手进行抢答（拍手最快的学生赢得抢答权）。
2. 学生听B部分录音，跟读单词。
3. 游戏活动：听听、画画、写写。
教师口述时间，学生把它们画出来，并写出该时间。比一比，看谁画得又快又准。
六、布置作业：
1、 朗读并抄写本课四会单词各一行，每行抄写单词四遍。
2、 课后认认钟，用英语向家长、同学汇报时间。
The Third Period（第三课时）
一、教学内容：
5B. Unit7 C部分 Ask and answer
二、教学目标：
1. 复习本单元所学词汇。
2. 进一步掌握句型What time is it? It’s….
3. 掌握句型It’s time for….。
三、教学重、难点：
四会掌握句型What time is it? It’s…. It’s time for….。
四、课前准备：
1. 准备C部分出现的图片。
2. 在黑板上预先写好课题Unit 7 After school。
五、教学过程：
A Listen to a rhyme 听本课的歌谣
B Free talk 师生交流
What time is it?
It’s….
C Revision 复习
1. 出示A部分会话投影片，看图进行学生会话。
2. 投影出示部分时间，让学生看图快速认读。
3. 看图学生分层次拼读本课四会单词。
4. 听写本单元部分四会单词、句型。
D Presentation and drill新授和操练
1. 运用教具钟拨不同的时间组织师生连锁问答。
T : What time is it?
S1.: It’s ten past one.
S1.: What time is it?
S2.: It’s twenty past five.
S2.: What time is it?
S3.: It’s a quarter to nine.
…
2. 教师出示C部分图片，继续组织师生问答，在学生回答What time is it? It’s….后，教师引导学生根据画面内容用It’s time for….的句型继续学说句子。教师与一个学生完整地示范第一幅图，并板书句型，后让学生模仿，分小组练说。
3. 小组学生汇报练习情况。教师抽查三到四组。
E Practice and consolidation练习和巩固
1. 分小组分别由学生自己挑选其他三幅图的内容，自由练说。
2. 各小组汇报练说结果。
3. 分小组朗读各图内容。
4. 学生摹仿、书写句型。
5. 游戏活动：“眼尖嘴快”
请全班学生闭上眼睛，让一名学生到台前拨时间，后该学生提问，全班学生回答，看谁答的又快又准确。
六、布置作业：
看图模仿教师板书内容造句。
七、板书设计：
Unit 7 After school
What time is it?
It’s…
It’s time for….
Unit7 D部分 Look and say
二、教学目标：
1. 复习本单元所学词汇。
2. 复习现在进行时句型。
3. 听懂、会说、会读并理解句型I want to….Do you want to join me?
三、教学重、难点：
四会掌握句型I want to….Do you want to join me?
四、课前准备：
1. 准备D部分出现的图片。
2. 在黑板上预先写好课题Unit 7 After school
五、教学过程：
A Listen to a rhyme and learn to say it.听本课的歌谣并学习歌谣 A clock。
B Free talk 师生交流
C Revision 复习
1. 出示B部分词汇图片，教师快速展示图片，学生认读并拼 读本课四会单词。
2. 出示A部分会话投影片，看图学生进行会话。
3. 投影出示不同的时间，运用句型What time is it? It’s….It’s time for….
组织师生问答。
4. 游戏活动：听听、画画、写写。
教师口述时间，学生把它们画出来，并写出该时间。比一比，看谁画得又快又准。
D Presentation and drill新授和操练
1. 教师口述示范句型I want to play cards. .Do you want to join me?让学生理解后，模仿练说。
2. 学生小组内模仿造句。
3. 小组汇报各组所造的句子。
4. 教师出示D部分图一，与一个学生示范图中会话内容：
S: I want to play cards. Do you want to join me?
T: No, I’m doing my homework.
5. 教师重复No, I’m doing my homework.通过表情、手势让学生明白该句的意思，后让学生模仿、练说。
6. 根据图片内容进行师生会话。
E Practice and consolidation练习和巩固
1. 学生分小组任意选择D部分图片内容，自编会话，进行表演。
2. 学生分小组进行汇报表演会话。
六、布置作业：
根据D部分图片内容分小组自编会话。
七、板书设计：
Unit7 After school
I want to….
Do you want to…?
No, I’m doing….
The Fifth Period（第五课时）
一、教学内容：
5B. Unit 7 E部分 Look and read, F部分Look and guess, G部分Listen and repeat
二、教学目标：
1. 通过复习，能较熟练地掌握本单元所学的词汇。
2. 能较熟练地在情景中运用本单元所学的日常交际用语和句型。
3. 听懂、会说、会读并理解E部分 Look and read。
4. 了解元音字母组合ar在单词中的读音。
5. 能熟练诵读本单元出现歌谣。
三、教学重、难点：
能正确地运用句型What time is it? It’s….It’s time for…. I want to….Do you want to…?并能在具体情景中以口、笔头形式进行交流。
四、课前准备：
1. 准备E、G部分出现的投影片。
2. 准备car, park, party, star单词卡片。
3. 在黑板上预先写好课题Unit7 After school
五、教学过程：
A Learn to say a rhyme学习歌谣 Do you like my house?
先让学生听一遍，后教师逐句领读，学生跟读。
B Free talk 师生交流
C Revision 复习
1. 出示B部分词汇图片，教师快速展示图片，学生认读并拼 读本课四会单词。
2. 出示A部分会话投影片，看图让学生用所学的语言知识来描述。
3. 引导学生用所学句型自编一段对话，是学生能灵活运用所学语言。
D Look and read
1. 教师出示E部分Look and read图片, 指导学生看图。
2. 教师边指导学生看图边组织师生问答What time is it? It’s a quarter to seven/eight/half past eight/twenty to twelve/ten to six/nine。
3. 看图，指导学生用所学句型描述各图。
F Look and guess
1. 游戏活动：你做我做。
请任一学生说时间，另一个学生根据时间做相应的动作，台下的学生用一般现在时第三人称单数句式完整地描述出学生所做的动作，如He washes his face at ten past six.
2. 学生根据本部分插图中的示范在小组内开展游戏活动。把学生分为三人一组，其中一个学生挂着一个设有时针的钟面，用左右手分别表示时针和分针。另一个学生做动作，让其他学生猜他们所演示的时间和动作，如She rides a bike at ten to three.
G Listen and repeat.
1. 教师出示单词卡片car, park, party, star，让学生认读。
2. 教师示范朗读单词，让学生跟读，后让学生体会单词中的共同音素。
3. 学生听录音跟读单词和句子，教师通过表情、手势让学生体会该句的意思。
六、布置作业：
听录音跟读本课所学内容，要求学生能够根据本课所学句子和日常交际用语进行自编会话，同桌表演。
The Sixth Period（第六课时）
一、教学内容：
5B. Unit7综合练习，本课练习册
二、教学目标：
1. 通过复习，能较熟练地掌握本单元所学的词汇和句型。
2. 能较熟练地在情景中运用本单元所学的日常交际用语并能运用所学句型进行交际。
3. 能熟练完成本课的练习册。
三、教学重、难点：
1. 熟练地掌握本单元所学词汇。
2. 能综合运用本单元所学过的句型和日常交际用语。
3. 能初步改编或扩充本单元所学的对话。
四、课前准备：
1. 准备本课词汇的图片。
2. 准备录音机和练习册听力部分的录音。
3. 黑板上预先写好课题Unit 7 After school
五、教学过程：
A Say a rhyme 学生集体说歌谣，并自己配上动作。
B Free talk 师生交流
C Revision 复习
1. 出示A部分会话投影片，看图让学生自由交际。
2. 引导学生根据自己每天的生活情况用所学句型适当扩充进行一段对话，要求学生能灵活运用所学语言。
3. 出示B部分词汇图片，教师快速展示图片，学生个别认读并拼读本课四会单词。
4. 听写本课四会单词night, half, past, a face, ready, on duty, quick, a game, a quarter, really。
D Practice 练习
1. 听听、画画、写写。让学生先听录音，然后画出时针以表示录音中提及的时间。
2. 听听、画画、搭配。先让学生根据录音内容在空白的钟面上画正确的时间，然后将表示时间的图片与表示活动的图片配对。请一位学生在投影片上示范做，然后校对。
3. 看看、想想、写写。先请学生看图，理解其意思，然后阅读句子，最后将次序乱了的字母拼成合适的词并填入空格，以使句子完整。
4. 看看、搭配、写写。让学生先看图及句子，并根据图意和句意将图旁的字母编号写在相应句子前的格子内，然后将句子和适当的时间用线连起来，最后根据图意完成句子。让学生进行小组讨论，后各组派代表板书，完成句子，看哪组做的又快又好。
5. 读读写写。学生边看图，边读句子，然后给句子进行正确排序，组成对话。先小组讨论，后小组汇报讨论结果。
6. 看看、读读、填空。让学生试着独立完成该题。
六、布置作业：
复习本单元的词汇和交际用语。
七、板书设计：
Unit7 After school
（投影）
八、教后笔记：
本单元主要围绕David一日的起居活动学习时间表达法及问答时间的句型，教师充分利用图片、努力创设情景引导学生操练。在操练过程中，学生对时间表达法有了很好的了解，并能熟练地掌握。只有个别学生对含有past, to 的时间表达法掌握还不够牢固。
5B .Unit 8 A部分 Read and Say
二、教学目标：
1 能正确理解、掌握A部分会话，并能朗读、初步表演对话。
2 能正确地运用对话中出现的日常交际用语。
3 初步掌握会话中出现的四会单词和句型。
三、教学重、难点：
能正确理解、掌握A部分会话。
四、课前准备：
1 准备本课会话的投影片。
2 准备录音机和磁带。
3 黑板上预先写好课题 Unit 8 At the weekends
五、教学过程：
A Listen to a song 听歌曲 We know.
B Free talk 师生交流
C Revision 复习
1 出示图片，让学生看图复习以前所学的词汇---go swimming/ climbing/ jogging, play football/ basketball, play the piano/ violin, go to the park/ cinema, watch TV, play chess ...
2 活动：听听、说说、做做。学生听教师口令边说、边做动作，巩固以前所学的词汇。
D Presentation and drill 新授和操练
1 教师出示一个挂历，指着星期六和星期天问学生 What do you do on Saturdays and Sundays? 学生回答 I play football. 教师接着说：How do you spend your weekends? Oh, you often play football at the weekends.让学生理解句子的意思，然后教师指着星期六和星期天对学生说 weekend, at the weekends, 让学生理解该词的含义,跟读模仿单词weekend, at the weekends 及句型How do you spend your weekends? 板书单词及句型weekend 及句型How do you spend your weekends?
2 教师在挂历的大部分周末处画上足球，剩下的画上TV---T : How do you spend your weekends? 启发学生回答: I often play football. Sometimes I watch TV. 通过直观的图示使学生了解often 和sometimes 的含义，板书单词often 和sometimes 及句型I often play football. Sometimes I watch TV.
3 师生问答，学习并操练How do you spend your weekends?及其答语 I often ... Sometimes I ...
4 教师出示课文投影片简介课文内容，让学生了解对话的背景，然后问学生：Look. This is Wang Bing. How does he spend his weekends? He likes surfing the Internet.通过画有电脑的投影片使学生明白该句的意思。教师接着说：I likes surfing the Internet, too. I think it's very interesting. I can learn a lot from it. I can read novels、learn English、QQ, etc on the Internet. What do you think of it? 教师通过手势、表情引出单词very, learn from, 教师示范发音，学生静听、模仿、跟读，并拼读。
5 教师接着介绍课文中人物的周末活动，然后问：How does he/she spend his/ her weekends? 通过手势、表情让学生理解该句的意思，引导学生用He/ She often ... 和 Sometimes he/ she... 回答，板书学习单词sport, catch, of course
6 让学生分层次练说句型How does he/she spend his/ her weekends? He/ She often ... 和 Sometimes he/ she...
7 让学生看图、听录音，整体理解对话。
E Practice and consolidation练习和巩固
1 让学生听录音，模仿跟读。
2 学生小组分角色朗读。
3 在熟读的基础上让学生在小组内试着表演对话。
4 游戏活动：看看、说说。让一个学生做动作，其他学生用英语描述。
六 布置作业：
听本课对话的录音，要求学生跟读、读熟，并能够在小组内进行表演。
The Second Period（第二课时）
一、教学内容：
5B. Unit 8 B部分 Look, read and learn
二、教学目标：
1 通过复习能正确熟练掌握A部分会话，并能表演对话。
2 能正确地?
篇16：牛津6B全册教案(译林牛津版七年级英语下册教案教学设计)
Unit 1 Who is younger? 教案
Unit 1 Who is younger? (period1)
Aims: 1. Ss can lsten , say and write the words: young, twin, minute, also.
2. Ss can listen, say and write the phrases: go for a walk, be glad to see ... under a big tree, have a chat,
a twin sister, as...as, twenty minutes, one day, the one child in my family look the same.
3. Ss can listen, read and say the dialogue.
4. Ss can translate the dialogue by themselves.
Teaching tools:
tape, English cards, picture
teaching diffculties:
Ss know the comperative degree
teaching importances:
young-younger, old -older, as...as
Teaching procedures:
一. Warming- up:
Free talk:
T: What festival do you like? why?
S1: i like...because...
T: What's the weather like today?
S2: It's cold
T: Yes, we know it's cold today, and it will be colder tomorrow.
Read ”cold---colder“ twice.
二. while-teaching procedures:
1.Comperative degree:
-er }
more }than...
e.g. big-bigger old-older
fat-fatter young-younger
more beautiful
T: Sentences: My grandmothe is old.
Mike's grandmother is older than...
Look at... I am tall.
Now, look at...she is taller than me.
(ask the students to make up sentences like this)
S1: I am short.
but ... is shorter than me.
S2: I am tall.
... is taller than me.
S3: This red ruler is long.
The black one is longer than mine.
T: There is two rulers in my hands.
This one is long, how about that one?
is it longer?
S1: No.
T: So, we can say this one is as long as that one.
ok, let's read after me.
S2: as tall/long/short/old as ...
T: Sentence: I'm as tall as my sister.
Ss make sentences.
2. Teach the dialogue:
a. Teach the first part.
T read the passage, Ss listen and underline.
the new words and phrases at the same time.
teach the main points:
go for a walk met-meet
glad=happy sat-sit
have a chat
Ss read the passage after one sentence by one sentence
Read in pairs
invite some Ss read individually.
b. Teach the second part
T: Su Hai and Su Yang are twin sisters.
Teach twin, a twin sister(brother)
T: So they look the same
Do you know who is younger? Whi is taller?
Ask Ss to read this part by themselves, and then answer the two questions
T: ”as tall as...
taller than...
twenty minutes younger than...“
Play the tape
Ss read after the tape one sentence by one sentence
Teach ”one day"
Ss read after T
Read in pairs
Then read together.
c: Read the two parts together.
Invite some pairs to read the text.
三. After-teaching activities:
1. underline the phrases.
2. review the comperative degree
四. Homework:
1. Ss copy the new words and prases.
2. Recite the words and phrases.
3. Pead the dialogue for several times.
Bb desighing:
Unit 1 Who is younger?
Part A
cold colder 1.比...高/大/老... 比较级＋than
tall taller eg. My grandmother is older than grandfather.
short shorter The cat is fat. The pig is fatter than the cat.
young younger
big bigger
fat fatter 2.和...一样高/大/老... as＋原级＋as
thin thinner
beautiful more beautiful eg. I'm as old as my sister.
interesting more interesting He's as tal as me.
Unit 1 Who is younger? (period2)
Unit 1 Who is younger? (period2)
Aims: 1.Ss can listen, say, read and write the phrases:the only child, one year younger than me.
2.Ss can read the whole dialogue.
3.Ss can do the exercise gy themselves.
Teaching tools:
tape card word
Teaching procedures:
Warming up:
1. Free talk: 1. Where are the children?
2. Who are twins?
3. Who is taller?
4. Who is younger?
Ss answer the questions.
2. Revision
Invite some Ss to read the first part and the second part.
Spell some words, translate some phrases.
Have a dictation.
while-teaching procedures:
1. Ss read part 3 in A
Answer the questions.
a. Does Jack have any brpther or sisters?
b. Who is Jimmy?
c. How old is Jack?
Ss answer the questions.
Teach： the only child.
one year younger than...
2. Play the tape, Ss read after the tape.
Read it in pairs.
Invite some pairs to read it.
After-teaching activities:
1. Ss do the exercise and then check the answers:
cousin, six, dog, younger
Ss read the passage together.
2. Read the whole dialogue.
Role-reading in groups
homework:
1. Copy the phrases.
2. Read and recite the whole dialogue.
Bb desighing:
Unit 1 Who is younger?
Qa: Does Jack have any brothers or sisters?
Qb: Who is Jimmy?
Qc: Who is younger?
Qd: How old is Jack?
Unit 1 Who is younger? (Period3)
1. Ss can listen, read, say and write the words ld, young, tall, short, big, small, thin,fat, heavy, and their cpmperative dagree.
2. Ss know and master the grammer.
3. Ss ca use the grammer.
Key and difficult points:
Ss can use the grammer.
Teaching tool:
tape, chant.
Teaching procedures:
Warming up:
Revision: Review the grammer: Comperative degree.
While-teaching procedures:
1. T write some words, Ss say the comperative degree.
old-older young-younger
tall-taller short-shorter
long-longer
big-bigger small- smaller
fat-fatter thin-thinner
strong-stronger heavy-heavier
Ss read the words, learn the words.
more beautiful more interesting
much＋比较级 ...得多
2. Ss translate the sentences
a.我奶奶比我爷爷老.
b.他弟弟比我叔叔强壮得多.
c.我爸爸比我叔叔强壮得多.
d.这只猪比那只猫胖.
e.我比你瘦.
f.我的书包比你的重.
g.她的尺比我的长.
f.我们学校和他们学校一样大.
After-teaching activities:
1. Copy the words
2. Translate some sentences
Homework:
Recite the words
Master the grammer
Bb designing:
Unit1 Who is younger?
old-older young-younger
tall-taller short-shorter
long-longer
big-bigger small- smaller
fat-fatter thin-thinner
strong-stronger heavy-heavier
Ss read the words, learn the words.
more beautiful more interesting
much＋比较级 ...得多
Unit 2教案
单元教学内容简析：
本单元主要话题是Jim 和他爸爸讨论如何进行体育锻炼展开的。通过对话引出语言项目：副词比较级。
本单元A部分通过创设情景，和爸爸聊天引出引出副词比较级的学习。
B部分主要学习常见副词及其比较级。
C部分和D部分是本单元的句型结构部分，重点学习句型及其答句。Do the boys jump higher than the girls? Yes ,they do. Does Jim swim slower than David? No, he doesn't. 要求学生能够四会掌握这些句型。
E部分为Look ,read and judge。要求学生能根据所给的内容判断对错。
F部分为游戏活动部分，要求学生在听听、看看、做做、玩玩中进行。
G部分为语音部分，让学生了解字母组合or在单词中的读音。H部分是一首韵律诗，要求学生能够熟练朗读、并能配以动作进行表演。
单元教学要求：
1. 能听得懂、会说、会读和会拼写strong, slow, low, fish, late, be good at.
2. 掌握会话中出现的三会单词和词组far , well, jog, do well in, need help with，
do well in , do more exercise, animal show, go for a walk..
3. 能听得懂、会说、会读和会写四会句型：
Ben runs faster than Jim .
Do the boys jump higher than the girls?
Does Jim swim slower than David?
4. 能听得懂、会说、会读：
That's true. Well done. Mike runs as fast as Ben.
5. 了解字母组合or在单词中的读音。
6. 会诵读歌谣 Run，rabbit，run。
单元教学重、难点： 见教学要求。
The First Period（第一课时）
一、 教学内容：
6B. Unit 2 A部分,Listen ,read and say.
二、教学目标：
1 初步掌握理解句型，并能在交际中口头运用副词比较级句型
2 掌握四会单词be good at, strong, faster ,higher. .
3 掌握三会单词和词组jog, need help with, do well in , That's true. .
4 能听懂会说句型 That's true. He is not as strong as the other boys.
5 四会句型：Ben runs faster than Jim .
三、教学重、难点： 能正确理解、掌握四会单词和句型。
四、课前准备：
1 准备录音机和本课A部分的磁带。
2 准备A部分的图片。
3 课前写好本课的课题6B. Unit 2A部分Look, read and say
五、教学过程：
A Sing a song. 跟录音机边听边表演唱英文歌曲Hello
B Free talk. 师生交流
T: Good morning, boys and girls.
Ss: Good morning,
T: Nice to see you again.
Ss: Nice to see you, too.
T: How old are you ?
Ss: I'm 12 years old.
T: How old is he?
Ss: He's 11 years old , too.
T: Do you run fast?
Do you jump high?
Do you swim fast?
T: Who is taller , you or your brother?
Which bag is heavier, yours or mine?
C Presentation and drill
1 教师通过刚才的师生问答引出句型I run faster than xxx。
2 教师板书fast和faster进行教学同时让学生理解。
3 教师出示音标让学生试读，然后集体升降调朗读。
4 教师找一学生和自己比跳高。T:I jump higher than xxx.同时板书high和higher，运用相同的方法学习这2个单词
5 就刚才创设情景，T：I'm good at jumping. T：He is good at English.引出be good at的学习。同时让学生模仿说几句。
6 教师板书巨型并领读。
D Practice and consolidation
1 让学生听录音，引出单词和词组jog，do well in，do more exercise的学习。
2 T板书以上单词和词组学生集体朗读，并扩展出词组和句子
3 让学生模仿跟读录音。
4 学生小组活动，每人接龙说一个比较级的句子，I run faster than xxx. I jump higher than xxx。
5 在次基础上小组讨论说出句型：Ben runs faster than me . xxx runs faster than xxx. .....
6 请学生说出自己擅长的方面运用句型be good at, I am good at English. 接龙说句子。
7 Ask and answer in pairs.。
六 布置作业：
听本课A部分的录音，要求学生跟读、读熟，并能够和同学比身高和年龄。
调查班级同学的年龄和身高
七、 板书设计:
Unit 2 More exercise
fast faster high higher
I jump higher than some of the boys in my class.
Ben runs faster than me.
The second period （第二课时）
Teaching contents:
Part B and C
Teaching aims:
1.Enable the students to listen, say read and write the words: low, high, far, farther, slow, early, better
2.Enable the students to understand, read and say the sentence patterns:
Ben runs faster than Jim.
Do the boys jump higher than the girls? Yes,they do.
Does Jim swim slower than David? No,he doesn’t.He swims faster than David.
Teaching focus:
1.Enable the students to listen, say read and write the words: low, high, far, farther, slow, early, better
2.Enable the students to understand, read and say the sentence patterns:
Ben runs faster than Jim.
Do the boys jump higher than the girls?
Does Jim swim slower than David?
Teaching aids:
Pictures, word cards, a tape recorder
Teaching steps:
Step1.Greeting and free talk
1.Listen and do
Revision the Verbs ：jump, run, swim, fly, skate, ski, climb, sing, dance, play football, get up, go to bed…
2.Quickly respond：说反义词
复习上单元的形容词，引出本课出现的副词：big- small, fat- thin, long- short, good- bad… well- bad, near- far, high-low, fast- slow, late- early, …
Step2. Presentation
1. T: What time do you go to bed?
S1: At …
T: What about you?
S2: At …
T: Who goes to bed later? S: ** goes to bed later than ***. （板书）此处的later解释为“晚的，迟的”
2.通过提问What time do you get up?引出 ** gets up earlier than ***.（板书）
3.通过跳远比赛引出** jumps farther than ***.（板书）
4.通过跳舞比赛引出** dances better than ***. （板书）
提醒学生注意这几个比较级变化，引导学生总结副词的比较级变化规则：（略）
5.通过比赛跳高引出Does ** jumps higher/ lower than ***?
Yes, he does. / No, he doesn’t. *** jumps higher than **.
Do ** and ** jumps higher/ lower than *** and ***?
Yes, they do./ No, they don’t.
6.可重复1-4环节的提问或者利用B部分的挂图，引出比较级的一般疑问句
7.Read the words in part B.
Step3. Work in pairs (Part C)
1.Look and read the dialogues
2.Ask and answer in pairs, using the dialogues and words（注意书上的fat 可改为far）
3.Act out their dialogues.
4.Write down the dialogues ss make
Step4. Homework
1.Copy the new words
2.Write down two dialoges.
板书设计：
Unit 2 More exercise
low- lower Does ** jumps higher/ lower than ***?
slow-slower Yes, he does. / No, he doesn’t. *** jumps higher than **.
late-later Do ** and ** jumps higher/ lower than *** and ***?
early-earlier Yes, they do./ No, they don’t.
far-farther
well-better
The Third Period (第三课时)
Teaching aims:
1.Enable the students to understand, read and say the phrases: an animal show,skate well(better), on the lake, fly in the flowers, like better.
2.Enable the students to use these expressions fluently.
That’s true.
Jim is not as strong as the other boys.
Mike runs as fast as Ben.
3.Enable the students to use the sentence patterns:
Ben runs faster than Jim.
Do the boys jump higher than the girls?
Does Jim swim slower than David?
Teaching aids:
1.A tape recorder
2.Picture of part D
Teaching steps:
Step1. Greeting and free talk
Are you good at …?
What subject are you good at?
Who is good at PE/…?
Do you do well in…?
Does ** do well in…?
Who runs faster than **?
Who can swim?
Do you get up early?
How do you go to school in the morning?
Do you want to do better in PE/ English/…?
What do you want to do?
Step2. Revision
1.Read the text together/ in roles
2.Practise the dialogue
Step3. Listen and write (Part D)
1.Look and answer:（要求学生回答要完整）
T: Look, here’s an animal show.Do you know them?What are they doing?
Which animals skate better, the monkeys or the bears?
Do the bees fly higher than the butterflies?
Do the fish swim faster than the ducks?
Which animals do you like better, the monkeys or the bears?
2.Listen and write
3.Check the answers
4.Ss say and write more sentences about the picture
Step4. Homework
1.Read and recite the text
2.Have a dictation(part B&C)
板书设计：
Unit 2 More exercise
___________ fly _______than _________.
_________ skate _______ than _________.
__________ swim _______ than ________.
The Fifth Period（第四课时）
一 教学内容
《义务教育课程标准实验教科书牛津小学英语》6B第二单元第四教时（Look, read and judge, Play a game, Listen and repeat, Say a rhyme）
二 教学目标
1 能在游戏中熟练地运用本单元所学的句型。
2 初步了解字母组合or在单词中的读音。
3 能够熟练并有感情的朗读儿歌Run, rabbit, run!
三 教学重点
1 熟练掌握副词比较级的表达法。
2 能综合运用本单元所学过的单词、句型。
四 课前准备
1 准备实物投影仪，将F部分的图片投影在屏幕上。
2 准备好一台录音机。
五 教学过程
A Revision.
1 Free talk.
教师请一位男生和一位女生到教室前，请他们分别做些动作。
学生先原地跳。
T: Who jumps higher, the boy or the girl?
Ss: The boy jumps higher.
学生单脚站立。
T: Who does better, the boy or the girl?
Ss: The girl does better.
再分别问两位学生，When do you usually go to bed? When do you usually get up?
和学生复习Who goes to bed earlier? Who gets up later?
B Listen and repeat听一听，读一读
1 让学生听G部分录音，先让学生听一遍。
2 学生模仿跟读两遍，并请学生说出这四个词的中文意思。
3 让学生用所听到的单词组成一个句子窗身情景让学生背诵。
C Play a game
1 将图片实物投影在屏幕上，教师向学生解释游戏规则，和学生一起把主要的动词词组罗列好，然后给学生做游戏示范。
T: Whose kite flies higher, the boy’s or the girl’s?
S: The girl’s flies higher.
T: Who runs faster, the boy or the girl?
S: The girl runs faster.
T: Who skates well, the boy or the girl?
S; The girl skates well.
几组示范后，学生记忆图片内容后，小组活动做游戏。
D Listen and repeat
1 教师播放录音，依次出示单词forty, horse, morning, sports, 指导学生跟读，引导学生说出or 在单词中的发音。
2 教师出示本部分中的句子，指导朗读，找出读音规律，进行朗读竞赛。看谁读得又快又准。
E Say a rhyme
1 教师播放录音，学生先看图和儿歌，听录音。
2 和学生一起解释儿歌的意思。
3 指导跟录音朗读儿歌。
4 挑出学生发音有困难的单词,纠正发音。
5 指导学生有感情得朗读儿歌。
F Homework
1 熟读G、H两部分
2 能有感情地朗读儿歌。
The Sixth Period（第五课时）
一、教学内容： 综合练习
二、教学目标：
1 掌握副词以及比较级的使用。
2. 能听得懂、会说、会读和会拼写late later,early earlier, far farther..。
3. 掌握会话中出现的三会单词和词组far, traffic , well, jog, do well in , have problems with
, do more exercise, animal show, go for a walk..
4. 能听得懂、会说、会读和会写四会句型：Ben runs faster than Jim . Do the boys jump higher
than the girls? Yes ,they do. Does Jim swim slower than David? No, he doesn't..
5. 能听得懂、会说、会读日常交际用语. That's true. Well done. Jim is not as strong as the
other boys. Mike runs as fast as Ben..
6. 了解字母组合or在单词中的读音。
7. 会说英语歌谣。
三、教学重、难点： 正确掌握B部分出现的四会单词,和句型。
四、课前准备：
1 准备录音机和本课H部分的磁带
2 练习题的投影片。
3 课前写好本课的课题。
五、教学过程：
A 跟音乐集体Say a rhyme: Run, rabbit, run!
B 1.Free talk. 师生交流
2. 请学生之间用所学的句型问答，分组比赛
C Revision 复习
1 看A部分投影片，创设情景让学生表演
2 让学生复述A部分第一段和会话。
3 学生小组内表演会话内容。
4 教师让学生根据实际情况说自己的优势
I'm taller than xxx
I'm younger than xxx
I'm stronger than xxx
My father is taller than
My pencil is longer than xxx's
I'm good at Maths ..
I'm good at English .
...I run faster than xxx.
I swim slower than xxx.
Tom jump higher than xxx.
...
5 让学生看黑板，朗读、拼读刚才教师板书的四会单词。
6 学生拿出课前准备好听写本，听写本课四会单词。
D 学生一齐拍手唱歌谣两遍。
E Practice and consolidation练习和巩固
1. 游戏； 用所学的句型来猜班级的同学
2．教师投影本单元的练习题请学生完成(略)
六 布置作业：
1 朗读本课的会话，要求学生能够复述、背诵。
七 板书设计：
投影本单元的练习题目
unit 3 教案
Unit 3 Asking the way Period I
I. Teaching aims:
a. Words: turn left/right, post office, along, street, city, crossing, shopping centre, middle school, primary school, train station, history museum
b. Daily express for communication:
Go along this street, and then turn right at the third crossing.
How can I get to the shopping center?
c. Sentence pattern:
Can you tell me the way to…, please?
II.Teaching steps:
Step1 Preparation
1. Listen and do
left, left, right, right, come, come, go, go ,go!
2. Listen and guess
a. I’m ill. Where shall we go? (a hospital)
b.I want to watch films. Where shall we go? (a cinema)
c. I want to watch the animals. Where shall we go? ( a zoo)
d. I want to watch the plays. Where shall we go? (a theatre)
e. I want to do some shopping. Where shall we go? ( a supermarket)
Yes, we can also go to a shopping centre.
f. I want to take a plane. Where shall we go? (an airport)
g. I want to take a bus. Where shall we go? ( a station-a bus station)
h. I want to take a train. Where shall we go? (a station- a train station)
i. I want to study. Where shall we go? (a school- a primary school.)
Next term, you’ll go to the middle school.
j. I want to see some old things. Where shall we go? (a history museum)
3. Read the new words
Step2. Presentation
1. Show a map of Garden City
Post office History meseum Cinema
Primary school Shopping centre Bus station
Middle school Hospital Train station
T: Look, this is a map of Garden City. Some teachers will come to our city tomorrow. And they need some guides. Can you help them? Let’s try to be a good guide, OK?
T: （take out some idenfication of the guides）Who can try? Let me try, first. （teacher takes one out and try it by herself/himself）
Now I’m at the train station. You can ask me the way.(show the title)Asking the way
S: Where’s the cinema?
T: Let me see. Er, … go along this street, and then turn right at the first crossing. The cinema is on your right.（use a map to help students understnd the new points）
Ss learn the words: along, street, crossing, turn right/left
2.Teacher give some examples。To remind the students use the different way to answer the questions：How can I get to…?
Can you tell me the way to …?
3.Students act the guides, answer the teacher’s inquire
Practise in pairs
Step3. Ask and answer (Part C )
1. Look at the pictures and teach the sentences: That’s all right. That’s OK. You’re welcome. Not at all.
2. Ask and answer in pair
3. Write down the dialogue
Step4. Homework
1. Copy the new words
2. Workbook : P23 H
Step5. blackboard designing
Unit 3 Asking the way
Go along this street.
Turn left/right at … crossing.
The … is on your left/right.
Unit 3 Asking the way Period II
I Teaching aims:
a. Words: on holiday, far from…, kilometre, stop, get on/off
b. Daily express for communication:
How far is it from here?
It's about a kilometre away.
You can take bus No.5.
How many stops are there?
c. Sentence pattern:
Can you tell me the way to…, please?
II.Teaching steps:
Step1. Listen to the song
Step2. Revision
1. Teacher show the picture of Mr Smith：Look, here’s a stranger in our city. He’s on holiday here. Now he’s in the bus station.He wants to visit some palces.
Post office History meseum zoo
Zhong Shan Road
Primary school Cinema Bus station
Ren Min Road
Middle school Hospital Train station
Jie Fang Road
Listen and answer: Where does Mr Smith want to visit?
2. T:Can you help him?
S1: Let me see. Er, … go along this street, and then turn left at the first crossing. The history museum is on your right.
T: Which road is it on?
S: It’s on Zhong Shan Road.
T: How far is it from ? How far? （show a ruler to help the students ）
Oh, it’s about a kilometre away. （compare:centimetre）
3.T: If we want to get there faster, we can take a bus.
Listen to the first period dialogue and answer:
Which bus can Mr Smith take?
How many stops are there?
4.Listen, read and learn
Learn the words:miss, stop
5．Listen to the second period dialogue and answer:
Where’s the bus stop?
Where’s the city post office?
6.Listen , read and learn
Learn the phrases:get off/ on, Get off at the …stop.
7. Read in roles
8.Read and complete the sentences
Step4.Further learning
1 Use a map to make a dialogue to ask the way
2use the main sentence parterns which in the text to have a commucation
Step5. Homework
1. Copy the new words
2. Read and practise the dialogue
3. Workbook B C D E
Step5. blackboard designing
Unit 3 Asking the way
How far is it from here?
It’s about a kilometre away.
You can take Bus No.5.
It’s on Zhongshan Road.
Get off at the third stop.
Unit 3 Asking the way Period III
I Teaching aims:
c. Words: bookshop, bank , hotel,place
d. Daily express for communication:
How can I get to …? It’s on River Road.
II.Teaching steps:
Step1. Listen to the song
Step2. Revision
1.Quickly respond: Words in PartB
2.T: Mr Green is new here. He asks Yang Ling how to get to the history museum. Do you still remember the way to the history museum?
(According the answers write on the blackboard):
Go along this street. Turn … at the … crossing. It’s on your….
Teach: Go along … Road. Turn … at … Road. The … is on your….
T: How far is it from here?
(According the answers to write on the blackboard):
It’s about a kilometre away.
T: If we want to get there faster, what shall we do ?
(According the answers write on the blackboard):
You can take bus No.… and get off at the … stop.
3. T:Mr Smith want to go to the City Post Office, too. How can he ask?
(According the answers write the blackboard):
Where’s the …?
How can I get to…?
Can you tell me the way to the…?
4. Read the useful expressions
5. Read the dialogue in Part A
Step3. Play a game (Part F)
1. T: Look at the map on Page28. Read the names of the places.
Teach: bookshop, hotel, bank(Bank of China),place
2.T（Prepare six cards of partF, choose one ,and tell them the position then describe the way, let the students guess out their destination ）
Now I’m at the hotel. I’m go along Guangzhou Road, then turning right at Nanjing Road. Then….The place is on my…. Where am I?
S: You’re at…
2.Call one student to give an example。
3．Play the games in groups of four
Step4. Read and talk(Part D)
1. T(use the map of Part F) ook, I’m at the train station. I want to buy some clothes for my cousin. How can I get to the shopping centre?
S: Go along Hong Kong Road, then turn right at Nanjing Road. Turn right at Guangzhou Road.It is on your right.
T: Andy wants to get there, too. Read the dialogue, tell us how he goes there.
2.Listen and read
3. Practise in pair
Step5. Homework
1. Write down the similar dialogue of PartD
Step6：Blackboard designing
Unit 3 Asking the way
Where’s the …? Go along this street/… Road.
How can I get to…? Turn … at … Road.
Can you tell me the way to the…? The … is on your…
You can take bus No.… and get off at the … stop.
Unit 3 Asking the way Period IV
I Teaching aims:
a.Words: steal, stole,shout, out of, thief, begin,began,heard, caught
b.Daily express for communication:
Stop thief!
c.Review the past sense
d.Phonic: The pronunciation of the letters:”ou” in the words
II.Teaching steps:
Step1.Sing a song
Step2. Revision
1. show the picture of partF, to review the words of the places
2. Look, I’m here. Can you tell me the way to …,please?
(To remind students use the sentence pattern)Go along ….Turn left/right …
T: How far is it from here?
S: It’s about … kilometre away.
T: It’s a long walk.
S: You can take bus NO.5 and get off at …
T: Thank you very much.
S: That’s all right.
3. Practise in pair
Step3. Read and number(Part E)
1. T: Nancy went to a bookshop last Sunday.What happened?Read the story and put the picture in the correct order.
2. Read , translate and learn
Rewiew the irregular verbs
Teach the new words: steal, stole,shout, out of, thief, begin,began,heard, caught
3. Read and number
4. Read the story
Step4. Listen and repeat
1. Read and compare
mouse blouse out house [au]
2. Read and recite the sentence
3. Give more examples: shout, mouth, about, …
Step5. Homework
1. Copy the new words
2. Recite the story
3. Workbook AGI
Step6 Blackboard designing
Unit 3 Asking the way
[au] mouse blouse out house
6BUnit5 The seasons教案
第一课时
一、教学内容：
1. 6B,Unit 5, B部分Look, read and learn.
2. The sentence structures: Which season do you like best? I like…What’s the weather like in…?
二、教学目标：
1 学习B部分,学生会读和拼写spring, summer, autumn, winter。
2掌握三会单词warm, cool ,sunny, cloudy, rainy, windy.
三、教学重点：
1学习B部分，套用旧句型，以旧带新。
2掌握四会单词和句型。
四、教学难点 灵活运用所学单词和句型进行交际。
五、课前准备：
1.准备录音机和第五单元的磁带。
2.课前写好本课的课题6B. Unit 5 The seasons
3.一些季节和天气的图片。
六、教学过程：
Step1.Free talk
T: Hello, boys and girls!
Today we learn Unit5 the seasons
(Write the title on the blackboard.)
The teacher read the title, and the students read after the teacher.
T: What’s the weather like today?
S:…
T:What can you see in the sky?Can you see the sun?
S:Yes./ No.
T:So it’s sunny/ cloudy.
T: Do you know how many months are there in a year?
S: There are 12 months in a year.
T: And how many seasons are there in a year?
S:There are four.
T: Yes,there are four seasons in a year.
T:Do you know What they are?
S:Spring, autumn, …
Step2:Presentation
1.Teach’spring, autumn, summer, winter’
Show S some pictures of seasons.
T: There are four seasons in a year.
And they’re…(show the picture of spring.)
S: spring
T:Yes.Who can spell the word?
S:S-P-R-I-N-G,spring.
T:Good.(Stick the word on the blackboard.)
Use the same way to teach’autumn’
T:Do you like swim?
S:Yes.
T:Can we swim now?
S:No.
T:Yes,it’s too cold.We can’t swim now.
So,when can we swim? In autumn?
S:No.
T:Can we swim in summer?
(Show S the picture.)
S:Yes.We can swim in summer.
Show S the word quickly.
T: Now who can spell the word?
S: S-U-M-M-E-R, summer.
T:Very good.(stick the word on the blackboard.)
Use the same way to teach winter.
2. Teach’warm’,’cool’.
T: We know it’s very cold in winter.What about summer?
S:It’s hot.
T:Yes,it’s very hot in summer. Is it very cold in spring?
S:No.Not very cold,and not very hot.
T: Yes.It’s warm in spring.
Is it hot in autumn?
S: No.
T: It’s…
S: It’s cool.
(The teacher show S the picture)
Let S read the words, and write the words on the blackboard.
3. Teach the sentence:Which season do you like best?
T: I like spring best. Because I can fly the kite.
Which season do you like best?
S1: I like …
Write the sentence structure on the blackboard.
3.Teach the sentence structure What’s the weather like…?
T:What’s the weather like there?
S:It’s sunny.
T:Yes.It’s sunny.(Show S the picture.)
T:Read after me.sun,sun,sunny.
S:Sun,sun,sunny.
T:Now,who can write the word on the blackboard?
S1: (Write the word.)
Teach the words:cloudy, rainy,windy in the same way.
Step3Practice
1. Play a game:
Guessing game:
A student say something about the word ,the others say out the word.
Ex1.T: It’s one of the seasons. It’s very warm. What is it?
S: It’s spring.
2.T:Today I take an umbrella to school.What’s the weather like today?
S: It’s rainy.
2. Repeat the words with the tape recorder.
3. Write the words on their own books..
(write the words on the book, every word write once. )
Step4.Consolidations
Work in groups:Which season do you like best?
What’s the weather like here in…?
Then finish the table.
Nameseasons spring summer autumn winter
S1 Jwarm
S2 Jhot
S3
S4
Step5.Blackboard Designing
Unit5 The seasons
Spring summer autumn winter
PICTURES
Warm cool sunny cloudy rainy windy
Which season do you like best? I like…
What’s the weather like …?
Unit5 The seasons 第二教时
一、 Teaching contents： PartA Listen,read and say.
二、Teaching aims：
1, Apprehensibility this lesson contents and learn the new words:countryside,snowball fights.
2,Enabele the students tomaster the main sentence pattern:What's the weather like ...?
3, To more understand the sentence:Which season in...do you like best?
三、Teaching focal points:：
1,Understand this lesson content.
2,To master further the new words and main sentence.
四、Teaching difficult points:
1,Use the comparative degree firstly.
2 Understand :be going to .
五、Teaching aids：
a small blackboard, tape recorder,pictures,wall picture
六、Teaching process：
Step1.Warming up
1,Greeting .
2,Look and guess. What's the weather like in…?
The teacher shows the weather forecast quickly,and then let the students guess what’s the weather like in…?
For example:S1： What's the weather like in Nanjing? S2: It's rainy.
Step2.Presentation：
1,Look and say
T:Here are some pictures ,look at the pictures and answer my questions.
PICTURE1：What city is it?
PICTURE2: What's the weather like in autumn in New York?
PICTURE3：What do the Americans usually do in autumn?
PICTURE4：What do the children usually do in winter in New York?
2,Listen and read.
(1)Listen to the tape and write the right order.
1． New York is very beautiful in spring.
2． Ben likes making snowmen in New York.
3． New York is usually very hot in summer.
4． Su Yang's father is going to New York.
5． People in New York like to go to farms in the countryside.
(2)Listen again and repeat after the tape.
(3)Read and try to understand the following phrases:
In the countryside, pick apples, make snowmen, great fun
Step3, Summary:
1,Sum up the new words and sentence patterns.
2,Sum up the weather in New York and make a table.
Step4, Homework
1.Talk about the weather in our hometown..
2. Ss make a dialogue like Unit 5.
3. Ss read Unit 5 after the tape.
Blackboard design:
Unit 5 The seasons
What’s the weather like in New York?
In spring:rainy and warm
In summer: as hot as in Nanjing
In autumn:cool ,sunny and windy
In winter:colder than Nanjing
Unit5 The seasons第三教时
一，教学内容：6B Unit 5 Part C(Ask and answer)and part E(Write and talk)
二，教学目标：1，掌握三会句型 Which season do you like best ?I like ┄┄. Why ? Because it’s ┄┄.I can ┄┄.
2，掌握四会句型 What’s the weather like ?
3，进一步在真实的语言环境中应用本单元的句型，提高学生英语做事的能力。
三，教学重点：1，学生看图能迅速的说出内容。2，拓展句型 Which season do you like best ?I like ┄┄. Why ? Because it’s ┄┄.I can ┄┄.
3，在真实的语言环境中运用所学知识。
四，教学难点：灵活运用所学句型进行交际。
五，课前准备：1，录音机和磁带
2，书写课题 Unit 5 The seasons
六，教学过程：
七，
Step 1 Say a rhyme
Spring,spring,spring,it's warm,warm,warm,
Summer,summer,summer,it's hot, hot, hot,
Autumn,autumn,autumn,it's cool,cool,cool,
Winter,winter,winter,it's snowy,snowy,snowy,
Windy,windy,windy,it's Beijing,windy city,
Foggy,foggy,foggy,it's London,foggy city,
Sunny,sunny,sunny,it's Lasha,sunny city.
Step 2 Free talk (the topic is”Weather ” )
1(1) eg: A: What’s the weather like in spring in JiangSu ?
B: It’s warm .
(2) work in park(学生自由交谈)
check it
2(1)eg: I like┄┄best .because it’s┄┄.I can ┄┄.
(2)（说出自己喜欢的季节及原因）Work in park
Check it (Four students a group )
Step 3Ask and answer(操练对话结合Part c 四幅图)
1 Show a picture (Part C picture 1 )
Ask : Which season ?
What does the boy do ?(Ask students to answer )
2 eg : A: Which season do you like best ?
B : I like ┄┄
A : Why?
B: Because it’s ┄┄.I can┄┄.
3 Work in park
Check it
4 Show the other pictures and dialogue
5 Do a survey.
Name Season Activity
Step 4 Write and talk
1Talk about the weather of some cities.
（1）Show a card (南京)
A：What's the weather like in summer in NangJin ?
B: It's very hot . It's often rainy .
A: What do people usually do?
B: They usually swim .
（2）Ask the students to choose one card and make a dialogue
2 Talk about the students' hometown, finish part E.
Check it .
Step 5 Homework
1 Write the dialogue (Part c)
2 Make the simmer dialogue (Part E)
Unit 5 the seasons第四课时
1、Teaching points:
a、Can pronounce /ow/ in the words.
b、Can use the four-skill sentences :What does … usually do? And What`s the weather like?
c、Can listen to the tape and find out the important phrases.
2、key and difficult points:
a、Can listen to the tape and find out the important phrases.
b、Grasp the four-skill sentences
3、Teaching tools:
wall pictures ;a tape recorder; Yangling and Nancy`s 头像
Teach steps:
Step1、warm-up
1、Greetings
a、Talk to the partner about the weather in hometown ,can use the sentences :What
does …usually do? And What`s the weather like?
b、Check the pair work
Step2、listen and write
1、show the wall pictures about part D, let the Ss look at it and answer some questions.
A、who are they ?
B、what`s the weather like in these pictures?
C、What does she usually do?
2、Answer the questions，invite the Ss to spell the words and write them on the blackboard.
3、 listen to the tape and find out the important phrases, then write the phrases on the paper , listen
to the tape again ,then complete the note.
4、 Can make the similar dialogue like part D.
Step3、listen and repeat
1、 show the four words ,let the Ss read the words
brown cow how now
2、 to know the“ow ”pronounce /au/,then find out the other words pronounce /au/,----down town
3、look at the picture and read the new sentence .
4、 listen to the tape and repeat them.
Step4、homework
1、Can read part D and part G after the tape.
2、Copy the four-skill sentences ,can use them make other sentences
Blackboard Design
Unit 5 the seasons
Wall picture
1、who are they?
2、what`s the weather like in these pictures?
3、What does she usually do?
Wall picture
brown cow how now
How many brown cows did you see just now?
Unit5 The seasons 第五教时
教学目标:
1．using the structures in the real situation，improve their ability of using English
2．feel the beautiful emotion of the rhyme
教学重、难点：
1. solve the problems with English in real situation
2. improve the ability of using English in games
教学准备：
1prepare the property for the games
2.cards pencils
教学过程：
Step 1Free talk：
1． Release their feeling
T: What date is it today? S: It's the ...
T: What’s the weather like today?
Step 2 Game
1 Show them some cards with the words: weather, spring, summer,
autumn, winter,
divide into several groups, and one do the mouth actions, the other guess the words
2 Show them some cards with the words: warm, cool, cloudy, rainy,
windy, snowy, sunny, rowing,swim,fly a kite ,play football,……
3.Do it in several times
Step 3Chatting
1.Improve the listening ability by different ways.
Talk about the weathers of some cities.
2.Teacher prepares some cards with the name of different cities on them, and let them choose then to make a short dialogue. E.g. Haerbin
A：What's the weather like in winter in Haerbin?
B: It's cold and windy. It's often snowy.
A: What do people usually do?
B: They usually go skiing and go skating.
3.Then listen carefully, and check their answers later.
4.Discuss the questions in group first, then answer them.
在小组内交流玩这个游戏，并鼓励学生改变游戏
step3 consolidation
1.Teacher shows some phrases, and let them make dialogue with them, and
check who the best is.
2.They think about by themselves
LianYunguang,summer, goswimming Nanjin, autumn, go climbing
Shanghai, spring, go walking Su Zhou, spring, visit the gardens
3.Do in group, and then choose one as homework, check the writing about this Unit
4.play a game (part f)
take out the cards that students prepared
讲清游戏规则，play the game in group
小组内展开游戏活动。
Step 5
Say a rhyme
1. Say with the music, train the emotion of saying English.
2. students Say follow the tape with music
step 6 homework
1.workbook page 34
板书：
Unit 5 The seasons
What’s the weather like today? It`s sunny
What do you usually do ? I often play football.
6B unit6 参考教案
单元教学内容简析：
本单元围绕“周末活动计划”这一话题开展各项活动，所涉及到的日常交际项目有介绍，打电话，询问和建议等，其中以询问What are you going to do...?及We're going to...为重点内容。 A部分Read and say板块展现了周六上午Gao Shan和David各自通过电话谈论周末安排的情景。B部分出现了八个有关周末活动的动词短语。C部分呈现六个活动画面，旨在联系巩固本单元的重点句型What are you going to do？ D部分是听写活动的安排。E部分展示了与妈妈谈论班级要去动物园游玩的场景。F部分为一个趣味游戏，旨在帮助学生通过游戏进一步复习巩固What are you going to do...?及其回答。G部分为语音部分，让学生了解字母组合ow在单词中的读音。H部分是一首歌曲，要求学生能够会唱、并能配以动作进行表演。
单元教学要求：
1. 能听得懂、会说、会读和会拼写plan, picnic, play, take part in..
2. 掌握会话中出现的三会单词still, project, zebra, Africa, elephant, concert, outing,
Beijing opera show, singing contest, sports meeting.
3. 能听得懂、会说、会读和会写四会句型：What are you going to do...? We're going to ...
4. 能听得懂、会说、会读日常交际用语Is that Gao Shan? Yes, speaking. By the way, what are you going to do...?
5. 了解字母组合ow在单词中的读音。
6. 会说英语歌曲Would you like to join us?
The First Period
一、 教学内容：
6B. Unit 6 B部分，Look, read and learn
二．教学目标：
1. 能听懂、会说、会读和会拼写单词picnic, play, take part in..
2. 掌握会话中出现的三会单词concert, outing, Beijing opera show, singing contest, sports meeting.
3. 能初步运用所学的词汇进行交流What are you going to do...? We're going to...
三．教学重点：
1.能听懂、会说、会读和会拼写单词picnic, play, take part in..
2. 能听懂、会说、会读本单元出现的动词词组。
四．教学难点：
能初步运用本课所学语言描述将要发生的动作。
五．课前准备：
1. 准备本课B部分的课件及录音机和磁带。
2. 黑板上预先写好课题 Unit6 B部分 Look, read and learn
六. 教学过程：
Step1 Organization
1.Warm up
1) Listen to a rhyme: Seasons.
2)Everyday English(S→Ss)
2.Free talk ---师生自由交谈,
T: Good morning, boys and girls. Ss: Good morning,
T: Nice to see you again. Ss: Nice to see you, too.
T: What day is it today? Ss: It's ....
T: What date is it today？ S1: It's ... of ....
T: What's the weather like today? S2:It's....
3．Revision
以“Seasons”为主题，做一个对话表演或编一个小短文。
Step2 Presentation and practice
1. 教师用课件播放有关周末活动的动画，让学生对教学内容有个感性的认识。然后拿出一些关于周末活动的图片（可使用B部分的教学图片），老师通过在黑板上贴图的方式创设情境向学生介绍周末活动。
T: Here are some pictures of some weekend activities. Look at them carefully. What are they doing? What is he/she doing?
2．让学生在小组中自学picnic, play, take part in.，concert, outing, Beijing opera show,
singing contest, sports meeting.，然后搞一个“Little Teacher”活动，使其获得成就感，然后让其他学生参与评价，老师通过个人说、集体说、小组说、开火车说等形式，检查学生的掌握情况，最后给予总结。
2. 学生听录音，跟读模仿。
3.教师继续引导：What are you going to do this weekend?
I am going to have a picnic. I am going to ....
Step3 Practice and consolidation练习和巩固
1.活动：Look and act--- 教师和学生说出词组，其余学生用动作表示。
2.游戏：Look and guess--- 教师或学生做某一动作，全班学生竞猜What are you going to do？或Who is going to...?
七．布置作业：
1.听录音，用正确的语音语调朗读本课词汇
2.抄写要求四会的单词和词组
八.板书设计：
Unit6 B部分Look,read and learn
动词词组和图片
The Second Period
一、 教学内容：
6B. Unit 6 A部分，Listen, read and say
二、教学目标：
1 能正确理解、掌握A部分会话，并能朗读、初步表演对话。
2 能正确地运用对话中出现的日常交际用语Is that Gao Shan? Yes, speaking.
By the way, what are you going to do...?
3 初步掌握会话中出现的四会单词plan
4． 掌握会话中出现的三会单词still
三、教学重、难点：
能正确理解、掌握A部分会话，并能熟练朗读、表演会话。
四、课前准备：
1 准备录音机和本课会话的磁带。
2 准备本课会话的投影片。
3 玩具电话
4 多媒体课件
5课前写好本课课题6B. Unit 6 A部分Listen, read and say
五、教学过程：
Step1 Organization
1.Warm up
1)学唱歌曲: Will you join me? 本歌曲是本单元的新内容，课前学习既可以营造学习英语的氛围，又可以为新知识的学习作铺垫。
2)Everyday English(S→Ss)
2.Free talk: A telephone call
师生以打电话的形式自由交谈，渗透Is that ...？ Yes, speaking.用 Do you like...? Can you ...?What do you do on ...?等句子谈论各自的爱好所能，为引出本课内容Do you like volleyball? Can you swim? What do you do on Sunday afternoon?做好准备。在师生自由交谈中，引出打电话形式，学习Is that ...？的答句Yes,
speaking.并适时运用一般将来时。如：
T: Do you like basketball? S: Yes, I do.
T: I like basketball, too. I'm going to play basketball this afternoon.
Step2 Presentation and practice
教师可将课文分为两个部分教授。
1.本文对话的引言部分。
教师出示David和 Gao Shan打电话的多媒体课件（上有日历显示为周六，天气暖和，阳光灿烂）。
1）学生自由描述或交谈。
2）听录音介绍场景。
3）听录音回答问题，在讨论中学习单词plan.
2.对话部分分两个层次进行教学。
1）第一部分重点了解David和 Gao Shan周六下午的活动安排。（内容在P46）在引言的基础上，教师可通过提问的方式导入课文对话部分。
Where is David doing? What are they going to do?
Where will they meet?教师通过提问What are they going to do?引导学生有目的地听课文的前半段录音，然后学习词汇still.最后通过填表格来完成本部分的学习任务。
Who
When
Activities
Where
2）第二部分重点了解David和 Gao Shan明天的活动安排。（内容在P47）
教师将课文图片设计成David和 Gao Shan各自单独的图片，让学生听录音看图片，了解对话内容。同样继续完成上面的表格。
Step3 Consolidation
1．学生听录音，模仿正确的语音语调，学习对话。
2.小组竞赛: 小组之间互相用已学过的问句进行提问，比一比哪一组问得多，哪一组正确回答的多。建议教师给每个学生建立积分卡，凡是竞赛活动中个人获胜的可积分卡上记5分，小组获胜的小组成员每人可积2分，学期结束后看看哪位同学的积分多。
3.分角色朗读对话。在理解课文的基础上，完成对话后面的练习。
4.Planning for the weekend：学生在小组中交流，创设情景对话。
六、布置作业：
1.听录音，模仿学说，熟练朗读并能初步表演该对话内容。
2.自制周末活动计划。
3.记忆A、B部分中的三会单词。
七、板书设计：
Unit 6 Planning for the weekend
plan still
Is that Gao Shan? Yes, speaking.
By the way, what are you going to do...?
The Third Period
一、教学内容：
6B. Unit 6 C部分，Look and say.
二、教学目标：
1.能听得懂、会说、会读和会写单词play与句型What are you going to do...? 及其回答We're going to ...
2.能在具体情境中熟练运用所学句型。
3.熟练完成本单元C部分内容。
三、教学重难点：
1.四会掌握What are you going to do...?句型及其回答并能在具体情境中熟练运用。
2.理解一般现在时的意义及构成。
四、课前准备：
1.教具准备：录音机、磁带。
2准备一些关于周末活动的图片（可使用B部分的教学图片）
3.板书准备：板书课题Unit 6 C Look and say.
五、教学过程：
Step1 Organization
1.Warm up
1)Sing a song: Will you join me?可边唱边表演。
2)Everyday English(S→Ss)
2.Free talk: Planning for the weekend
2.Revision
1)Play a game: Bingo。教师将班级学生分组，通过游戏达到巩固、检查单词的目的。
2) A部分对话表演赛：可通过分角色朗读、分角色表演，改编对话等形式巩固、操练A部分。
Step2
1.看图问答：教师指着图片提问What are you going to do...?学生回答We're going to ...复习巩固句型。
2.教师可以在学生充分练习的基础上，安排适当的读写的练习，以促进读写技能的不断提高。
Step3 Practice and Consolidation
1.Guessing game： 教师课前准备一些关于周末活动的图片（可使用B部分的教学图片），让一学生到台前选择自己最喜欢的一件，其它同学用What are you going to do...?句型猜他（她）将要做什么。猜对最多的同学即为优胜者，可以积分卡上记5分。
2.小组竞赛：用What are you going to do...? 及其回答We're going to ...句型造句，看看哪个小组说得最多，获胜的小组每位成员可在积分卡上加2分。
六、布置作业：
1.回家后自创情境，自己找搭档操练What are you going to do...? 句型。
2.用We're going to ...句型写出自己周末将要做的五件事。
3.阅读一篇英文的小短文。
4.预习D，F部分。
七、板书设计：
Unit 6 Planning for the weekend
What are you going to do...?
We're going to ...
The Fourth Period
一、教学内容：
6B. Unit 6 D部分 Listen and write , F部分 Play the game
二、教学目标：
1.能听得懂、会说、会读和会写句型What are you going to do...? 及其回答I am/ We're going to ...
2.能在具体情境中熟练运用所学句型。
3.熟练完成本单元D和F部分内容。
三、教学重、难点：
四会掌握What are you going to do...?句型及其回答并能在具体情境中熟练运用。
四、课前准备：
1.教具准备：录音机、磁带；图片等。
2.教学准备：骰子和棋子，预习D 部分内容。
3.板书准备：板书What do you like...?
五、教学过程：
Step1 Organization
1.Warm up
1) Sing a song: Will you join me?可边唱边表演。
2) Everyday English(S→Ss)
2.Revision
1) 利用图片进行师生问答练习。如：What are you going to do...? I am / We're going to ...
2)小组接力赛：教师将班级学生分成若干组，每组发一张纸条，每人写一句，进行接力传递，看看哪个小组传得快，写得正确，获胜的小组每位成员可在积分卡上记2分。
Step2 Presentation（Part D）
1.教师出示本部分的教学图，指导学生先观察图片，简要地介绍对话背景，让他们了解对话主题。
Today is Friday. David and Liu Tao are talking about what they are going to do after
school.
2.同桌或小组根据图片预测可能听到的内容，做好听的心理准备。
3.教师播放全文录音，使学生对短文的内容有个大致的了解，鼓励学生养成整体接受语言材料的习惯。
4在听写的过程中，教师要注意观察学生的反应，要在听力技巧上及时给予指导，如根据对话内容，针对所填词语设计一些问题，请学生听完后口头回答，帮助学生理解对话，并在此基础上完成填空练习。
5学生完成之后，教师可与学生讨论练习答案，分析错误原因，找到解决方法。
对此练习中需要的非四会单词，教师可出示在黑板上或给出单词让学生有选择地填写。
Step3 Practice and Consolidation(Part F)
1.教师事先布置学生根据图例，了解有关游戏规则和方法，准备好游戏工具，包括骰子和棋子。
2.指导学生可在小组内开展游戏活动。
3.教师教师也可鼓励学生自己自创新的玩法，在游戏中进一步巩固所学知识。
六、布置作业：
1.抄写本单元要求四会掌握的句子。
2.利用本单元所学知识，自编对话并会表演。
3.阅读一篇课外英语小短文或小故事。
The fifth Period
一、教学内容：
6B. Unit 6 E部分Read and number G部分 Listen and repeat
二、教学目标：
1.能在教师指导下正确理解语篇内容，提高学生的朗读和阅读理解能力。
2.能在理解的基础上，指导学生找到相应的图片。
3．掌握语篇中出现的三会单词project, zebra, Africa, elephant。
4.能初步了解字母组合ow在单词中的读音。
三、教学重、难点：
正确理解语篇的内容，并能实际运用。
四、课前准备：
1.教具准备：录音机、磁带；图片等。
2.板书准备：板书课题 Unit 6 Planning for the weekend
五、教学过程：
Step1 Organization
1.Warm up
1)Sing English songs: 教师组织各小组进行英语歌曲的拉歌比赛。
2)Everyday English: (S→Ss)
2.Revision利用图片进行问答练习，复习巩固C部分句型。可以师生问答，也可以生生问答，还可以小组与小组之间问答。
Step2 Presentation
1.完成书中E部分内容：
1)教师先指导学生阅读本课的语言材料，大致理解句子含义，想象活动场景。
2)对本部分出现的生词project, zebra, Africa, elephant，教师可采取不同的处理方法：可在阅读前讲解，可启发学生通过上下文猜测，也可指导学生借助课文插图理解词意。
3)引导学生阅读对话，选择合适的图片，完成本部分阅读练习。
2.完成书中G部分内容：
1)老师让学生自己朗读单词，边读边体会字母组合ow在单词中的读音。
2)指导学生听录音跟读单词和句子。教师可利用图片或多媒体课件帮助学生理解句意。
3)教师可知道学生朗读，也可在学生中开展朗读比赛。
4）讲师鼓励学生自己归纳整理其他例词，编写绕口令或其他句子并练习朗读。
Step3 Consolidation
1.分小组排练E部分的对话，然后表演出来。
2.Play a game:接龙比赛
教师将学生分成若干组，每组以snow开头，要求学生用含有相同音素的单词进行接龙比赛，看看哪个小组接得多，接得快！获胜的小组每位成员可在积分卡上记2分。
六、布置作业：
1.抄写四会单词和句型，并用句型造句。
2.排练E部分的对话。
The Sixth Period
一、教学内容：
复习及完成《学习手册》
二、教学目标：
1.通过复习，能熟练掌握本单元所学的单词。
2.通过复习，能熟练地在情境中运用本单元所学的句型和日常交际用语。
3.熟练完成本单元《学习手册》中的练习。
三、教学重、难点：
通过复习，巩固本单元的知识点，达到熟练运用。
四、课前准备：
1.教具准备：录音机、磁带；实物；图片等。
2.教学准备：复习本单元所有知识点，准备本节课检测。
3.板书准备：板书课题Unit 6 Revision
五、教学过程：
Step1 Organization
1.Warm up
1)Sing English songs: 教师组织各小组进行英语歌曲的拉歌比赛。
2)Everyday English:
a. Daily report（S→Ss）
b.本节课教师可以给学生确定话题：Say something about your weekend，以巩固上节课所学内容。
2.Revision
1)利用图片和实物进行问答练习，复习本单元所学单词和句型。
2)Dictation：听写本单元要求四会掌握的内容及部分三会单词。
3)情境表演：要求学生根据教师提供的情境自编会话进行表演。
a.打电话和好朋友商量周末活动计划
b.和爸爸妈妈商讨五一黄金周的活动安排
c.Nancy的生日马上要到了，Yang Ling和Mike正商量送她什么礼物。
Step2 Practice（完成练习册）
1.听力练习一：Listen and choose要求学生听清录音内容，正确理解图意后选择正确答案。
2.听力练习二：Listen and tick先指导学生看懂短文内容，了解每个人做了什么，再在表格里
打钩，有的人做的事不止一件，需听清。
3.书面练习一：Read and write指导学生先看懂句子意思，再填入所缺单词。
4.书面练习二：Look, think and write让学生先看图，读懂所给句子，联系所给场景，排列句子顺序，让学生在小组内讨论完成。
5.书面练习三：Look, read and write教师先组织学生看图，读懂所给句子，联系所给场景进行讨论，填入所缺词句。
6.书面练习四：Read and answer本题为阅读理解题。教师先让学生独立阅读短文，理解大意，然后分小组讨论所给出的问题。
7.通过问答或小组讨论核对答案。
六、布置作业：
1.复习巩固本单元所学的四会单词和四会句型
2.能熟练朗读本单元会话，并能自编自演一段小对话
3.自选一篇课外阅读材料进行补充阅读
4.预习下个单元学习内容
Unit 7 教案
一、单元教学内容简析：
英语学习的目的就是要交际。本单元围绕“写信”这一主题，从谈论自己的笔友入手到着手给笔友回信，把有关“自我介绍”、“询问他人情况”、“征求意见”等日常交际用语、词汇和句型有机结合起来，并运用于对话和课文之中。本单元涉及到的了内容十分丰富，是对多种主题的综合，包含到的语言点和知识点也很多。既然是“通信“，教师就要根据学生的具体情况让这个主题在学中真正地体现出来。可以组织多种活动，如和外班，外校的学生相互通信还可以针对小学生爱上网沟通的特点，鼓励他们交外籍朋友，培养他们的综合语言运用能力，从而达到交际的目的。
Teaching aims：
1．Students can understand, say, read and spell the words:
penfriend, also, glue, write a letter。
2．Students can understand, say and read the words and phrases:
a postcard, finish, receive, subject, writing paper, envelope, e-mail address, fax number。
3． students can master the daily expressions : I hope so. What should I do?(Three skills)
4． students can master the sentence patterns: Can I have...? What for? I want to... (Four skills)
5． The pronunciation of “ur”
6． Students can read the rhyme : I want to write a letter.
Main and difficult points:
1． Students can master the words.
2． Students can understand the dialogue and can read it.
3． Students know how to write an English letter.
4． Encourage students to communicate with the foreign friends.
Teaching periods:
Period 1：B. Look, read and learn C. Look and say
period 2：A. Listen, read and say (page 54)
Period 3：A. Listen, read and say (page55)
Period 4：D. Listen and write/ E. Read, think and write
Period 5: F. Think and write G. Listen and repeat/ H. Say a rhyme
The First Period
一、 Teaching contents：6B Unit 7 B & C
二、 Teaching aims：
1、 word: (4 skills) glue.
2、 3 skills: envelope, postcard, fax machine, telephone number
3、 3 skills：Can I have...? What for ? I want to ... Sure. Here you are.
三、Points： the words in B & sentences in C。
四、Teaching aids：letter paper, envelop, postcard, glue, and the pictures, tape and the recorder
五、Teaching steps：
A．Organization.
1. Greeting.
2. Free talk.
3.Sing : Will you join me ?
B．Presentation and practice.(Look, read and learn)
1、e-mail
2、telephone number.
T: My telephone number is ..... What's your telephone number?
3、T shows the pictures, ss listen to the tape. to find out who learns fastest.
Let ss read the words ,and the others read after him/her.
(writing paper ,envelope, post card, glue)
5、Read after the tape, the after the teacher, together
c．Consolidation .
A good memory:
T shows P, ss say the words.
d. Use the words to practice the following sentences.
Can I have a postcard ?
S: What for?
T: I want to write to Tom .
S: Sure. Here you are.
e. practice the sentences and words with their partners.
And then let some come say.
f. ss practice C with their partners.
g．Assigning homework.
1、 listen and read B.
2、 Copy the words in the eb.
3． Write C in their own book.
3、 prepare A.
The Second Period
Teaching material
6B Unit 7 A. Listen read and say（page 54）
Teaching aims:
1． Students can understand, say, read and spell the words: penfriend,
2． Students can understand the dialogue and read it .
3. Students can use the knowledge they’ve learned in this class to communicate with foreign friends.
Main and difficult points:
1． Students can understand and master the dialogue.
2． Students can use the expressions and sentence patterns freely and correctly.
Teaching tools:
a letter, pictures, cards, tape, tape recorder
Teaching steps:
Step 1. Greeting.
step 2. Revision.
1. T: (show several pictures of the words in part 2)
Ss: Look at the picture and speak out the words.
T: what for?
Ss: I want to …
2. Students can get anything they’d like if they can make the right conversation with the teacher.
S: can I have the glue?
T: What for?
s: I want to make a kite.
T: Here you are.
Step3 . Presentation
1. Follow the conversation above
T: Can I have some writing paper?
Ss: What for?
T: I want to write a letter to my penfriend.
Ss: Learn the word: penfriend
2. Show the picture of Part A
T: I have a penfriend. Liu Tao also wants a penfriend.
1.Who did Liu Tao read about yesterday afternoon?
2.What did Peter want in China?
3. What would Liu Tao like to do?
Ss: Answer the questions.
3．T: Liu Tao want to write a letter. What things does he need?
Ss: Answer.
T: What will he say to mum if he want these things.
Ss: Speak out the sentences.
4. T: Please put the sentences in the right order.
( )Thank you.
( )I want to write a letter.
( )Sure. Here you are.
( )What for, dear?
( )Mum, can I have some writing paper, an envelope and some stamps, please?
5. Listen to the tape and think about these question.
Q1: How many questions does mum ask?
Q2: What are Liu Tao’s answers?
Step4 Practice
1. Listen to the tape and imitate.
2. Read the dialogue in chorus and by themselves.
Step 5 Consolidation.
1． Fill in the blanks.
Time:____________________
Person:__________________
Activities: He ____ _____ an ______ boy, Peter. Peter wanted a _________ in China. Liu Tao would like to _________________________. He wants to _______________.
2． Act the dialogue.
Step 6 Assigning homework.
1． Listen to the tape and read
2． Preview next part.
3. Copy the new words and sentences.
The Third Period
Teaching materials:
6B Unit 7 A. Listen read and say（page 55）
Teaching aims:
1． Students can understand, say, read and spell the words: also
2． Students can understand , say and the words: subject, e-mail address
3． Students can understand ,say and read the expressions: I hope so. What should I do?
4． Students can understand the dialogue and read it .
4. Students can use the knowledge they’ve learned in this class to communicate with foreign friend
Main and difficult point:
1. Students can understand the dialogue and can use the expressions and sentence partteners freely and correctly.
2. From learning, students can know how to write an English and communicate with foreigners.
Teaching tools:
Pictures, cards, letter, tape with Peter’s self-introduction on it, tape recorder
Teaching Steps:
Step 1. Greeting.
Step 2. Revision.
1. T: Answer the questions
Q1 Does Liu Tao want to have a postcard?
2.What does Liu Tao want to have?
3.What does Liu Tao want to do?
2. Retell the dialogue
Step3. Presentation
1. T: Liu Tao wants to be Peter’s penfriend. Let’s know something about Peter.
Ss: Listen to the tape of Peter’s self-introduction.
Dear Friend:
I'm Peter. I'm from the UK. I want a penfriend in China.
Please listen to my self-introduction.
I live in London. I have a brother and a sister. I like listening to music and making model planes.
Waiting for your letter in reply.
With best wishes
Peter
2． After listening. Discuss in groups.
Question 1. Who's Peter?
2. Where does he live?
3. Does he have any brothers or sisters?
4.What are his hobbies?
3.T: Liu Tao’s mum gave him some suggestions.
Open your books and find out them.
Step4. Practice
1. Listen to the tape and imitate
2. Read dialogue in chorus and by themselves.
3. Complete Peter’s details’
Step5. Consolidation.
1． Retell the dialogue according to the form
2． Guessing game
Finish the form. S choose one and guess who he/she is.
Key words: Age, City, Family, hobbies.
E．Assigning homework.
1． Listen to the tape and read the dialogue
2． Recite the dialogue.
4. Complete this form and sen
篇17：Unit 3 Online Travel教案 (译林牛津版英语七年级)
Comic strip and welcome to the unit
By Xu Xianggu
1.Teaching aims and demands on knowledge and abilities
a. To get to know the main topic of this unit ---computer.
b. To learn to guess the meanings for each picture.
c. To get to know the basic use of a computer and learn to talk about them.
e. To gain a feeling of success through making up and acting out after the samples in English.
f.To develop our students’ society sense
2.Teaching focus:
To leaen to talk about what to use a computer for.
3.Teaching difficulty:
To get to know the new grammar –passive voice
4. The teaching methods
Teaching aids: multi-media
Teaching methods: Communicative Approach
Study strategies: autonomous learning; pair work & group cooperation
Part Three Teaching procedures:
Procedure
Step One Greetings
Step Two presenting
1.I’ll show a picture of a computer and ask:
What is this?
Do you have one at home?
What do you usually do in your free time ?
Do you enjoy computer games ?
2.Leading-in by asking
Do you only use your computer to play games?
What do you use your computer for?
Why?
How often do you use your computer to help your study or play games ?
(Here encourage students to give opinions as many as possible and present the expressions such as drawing and designing , playing games, sending receiving e-mails)
3.Show the pictures one by one and ask
Do you know any other uses of a computer?
What does your father use a computer for?(According to each picture present the words and expressions such as word processing ,search for information, writing computer programs)
4.Read them and try to make sentences with them.
Step Three practice
1. Check them on the words and phrases: Show the six pictures and ask them to give the computer use in English.
2. Work in pairs with the expressions: What do you use your computer for? I use it to-
3.And then ask two students to read the dialogue as Daniel and Simon and the others listen to them with the following questions
What does Simon usually use his computer for?
Why and how often?
4.Work in pairs of two after the model (Here more opinions encouraged)
Step Four Presenting
1.Listen to the tape with this question: Do Eddie and Hobo know well about computers ?
2.After listening, ask the students the following questions
What do Eddie and Hobo think the computer look like?
Do you know what the remote control really is?
3. Ask the students to read the part and act out in pairs
4. With the sentence: the TV is turned on now, introduce the sentence pattern-- passive voice
（Write it on the blackboard and explain the form and meaning with more samples: such as The blackboard is cleaned after class ,I am often asked questions by my teacher in class .）
Step Five Practice
More practice with the words and expressions such as online travel, online friends , Have no idea, look like …, the remote control, turn …on, turn –off, change the channel, show the different uses of …, play games, search for…search sb for , send and receive e-mails, write computer programs,
Step Six Homework
a. Read the comic strips and try to recite it.
b. Try to review the new words and expressions in this period.
c. Prepare for the reading part.
Teaching Designs
Online Travel
online Searching for information What do you use your computer for?
remote control Word processing I use it to---
turn on Writing computer programs The TV is turned on now.
have no idea The blackboard is cleaned after class.
【7b unit 1 Dream homes(译林牛津版七年级英语下册教案教学设计)】相关文章：
2.Phrases in the Unit 1 (译林牛津版高一英语必修二教案教学设计)
3.译牛7A Unit 1 重点难点讲解(译林牛津版七年级英语上册教案教学设计)
4.Unit 2, Module 1 学案设计(译林牛津版英语高一)
5.牛津高一英语模块1 Unit 1 表格式教案(译林牛津版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)
6.模块3 unit 1 reading (译林牛津版高一英语必修三教案教学设计)
7.模块7 Unit 1 Word power(译林牛津版高二英语选修七教案教学设计)
文档为doc格式
